JP7391725B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Based on the fluctuating display result, control is performed to an advantageous state, and based on the fluctuating display result, the game medium is controlled to a predetermined state so that the game medium can enter a specific area within the variable winning means, and in the predetermined state, the specific area is controlled to be in an advantageous state. A gaming machine has been proposed that is controlled to an advantageous state based on the entry of gaming media into the player (for example, Patent Document 1) .

JP2018-99307A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, no consideration was given to the variable display of small symbols.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suitably displays variable patterns of small symbols .

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention:
A gaming machine that displays identification information variably and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a retention storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as retention information;
Specific notification execution means capable of executing specific notification to notify that control is possible in the advantageous state;
Reduction variable display means capable of variably displaying the reduced identification information in a manner smaller than the identification information;
The suspension information includes specific suspension information regarding a variable display that can be controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific notification execution means is
In a specific variable display that is a variable display of identification information at a specific timing, when the specific variable display enables control to the advantageous state, and when the variable display corresponds to the suspension information stored in the suspension storage means. The specific notification can be executed in the case where the control becomes possible in the advantageous state,
executing the specific notification in the specific variable display when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display;
The variable reduction display means is
When the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display, reduction identification is performed in connection with the execution of the specific notification in the specific variable display. information can be derived,
When the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display, the display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information corresponding to the specific variable display is A first display result suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state or a second display result suggesting that the control is not in the advantageous state can be derived,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
In the specific variable display, when the second display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of reduced identification information, control is possible to the second advantageous state based on the specific pending information,
In the specific variable display, it is possible to temporarily stop the variable display of the identification information and then resume the variable display again,
A preview effect can be executed when the re-variable display is executed,
As a display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information, the execution rate of the preview effect is different depending on whether the first display result is derived or the second display result is derived.
(1) Other gaming machines are
A gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 94AK) that can play a game and be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a variable display of the first special symbol;
A second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display 8b) that performs a variable display of the second special symbol;
Decorative variable display means (for example, performance display device 9) that performs variable display of decorative designs (for example, performance designs) in response to the variable display of the first special design or the second special design;
A special control means (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the process of S165) capable of controlling the special state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
A predetermined state (for example, a small win game state) in which the game medium can pass through a specific area (for example, the V winning area 870) based on the display result of the second variable display means being a specific result (for example, a small win symbol). control to the advantageous state based on the game medium passing through the specific area in the predetermined state;
The special control means selects, as the special states, a first special state (for example, a special state that ends after one change) and a second special state in which the period of the special state is longer than the first special state (for example, 99 times). (a special state that ends with fluctuation), and can be controlled to either
The decorative variable display means is
It is possible to perform a pseudo variable display that resumes after temporarily stopping the variable display of decorative patterns,
A normal variable display pattern in which the pseudo variable display is not executed (for example, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 101, 102, 103, 202, and 203), and a predetermined number of pseudo variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). pattern (for example, a variation pattern with variation pattern numbers 111, 112, 212), and a specific time pseudo variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern numbers 113, 114) in which the pseudo variable display is executed specific times (for example, 12 times) more than the predetermined number of times. , 214 variation patterns), it is possible to perform a variable display of the decorative pattern,
In the second special state, when the display result of the second variable display means becomes the specific result, it is possible to perform variable display of the decorative pattern using the specific time pseudo variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-4 (D) )),
The second special state includes a first section (for example, the section until the end of the fifth fluctuation) and a second section after the first section (for example, the section after the start of the sixth fluctuation). and,
The decorative variable display means is
In the second section, the ratio of performing the pseudo variable display is lower than in the first section (for example, FIGS. 19-4 (C) and (D)),
In the first section, decorative patterns can be displayed variably using the normal variable display pattern (for example, FIGS. 19-4(C) and 19-4(D)).
According to such a configuration, the first special state can be made to appear longer by the pseudo-variable display, and it is possible to prevent the pseudo-variable display from occurring frequently in the second section of the second special state and reducing the interest in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine seen from the front. It is a figure showing a hit type table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on a main board. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a hit type determination table. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows starting port switch passage processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit release preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing production control main processing. It is a flowchart showing production control process processing. It is a figure showing an example of a screen composition. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a command at the time of start winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of determining a variation pattern. It is a diagram showing execution periods and execution timings of various effects. It is a diagram showing execution periods and execution timings of various effects. It is a flowchart showing production symbol variation start processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a determination of a confirmed effect pattern, etc. It is a flowchart showing small symbol determination processing. It is a flowchart showing processing during effect pattern variation. It is a flowchart which shows final variation production processing. It is a flowchart which shows acquisition performance processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when an acquisition performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a character panel image. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a suspension related data storage part, etc. It is a diagram showing an example of determining the winning notice timing. It is a flowchart which shows acquired character determination processing. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining the number of acquired characters. It is a figure which shows the example of a determination of the character for a win notice, and the character for a loss notice. It is a figure showing an example of control of acquisition effect. It is a flowchart which shows a small pattern change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows expectation level up production processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when an expectation level up effect is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of determining how to increase the expectation level of winning notice and the expectation level of losing notice. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting expectations level increasing conditions. It is a flowchart which shows preview production processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a notice performance control pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display after an expectation level increase effect is complete. It is a figure which shows the example of a display after an expectation level increase effect is complete. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the variation pattern of the characteristic part 100AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining a variation pattern of a characteristic portion 100AK. It is a diagram showing execution periods and execution timings of various effects of the feature section 100AK. An example of a small pattern that is stopped and displayed after the final change in the special state is shown. It is a timing chart showing the timing etc. when a small pattern is stopped and displayed. It is a flowchart showing the effect pattern variation start process of the characteristic part 100AK. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition effect processing of the characteristic part 100AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the characteristic part 100AK. It is a timing chart etc. of the special state final change in the modification of the characteristic part 100AK. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit determination ratio of characteristic part 93AK. It is a figure which shows the winning distribution of the characteristic part 93AK. It is a diagram showing a list of variation patterns corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol of the characteristic part 93AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display of the 2nd special symbol of the characteristic part 93AK. It is a timing chart which shows the example of a fluctuation display after the characteristic part 93AK is controlled to the special state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the characteristic part 93AK. 12 is a timing chart showing a variation display example of a modified example of the characteristic portion 93AK. It is a figure which shows the pseudo variable display pattern of the characteristic part 93AK. It is a figure which shows the opportunity number of the characteristic part 93AK. An example of the determination ratio of the pseudo variable display pattern of the characteristic portion 93AK is shown. It is a figure which shows the pseudo variable display pattern of the characteristic part 93AK. An example of the determination ratio of the pseudo variable display pattern of the characteristic portion 93AK is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation production control pattern setting process of the characteristic part 93AK.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko game machine is shown as an example of a game machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko game machine, and may be applied to other game machines such as a coin game machine.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 seen from the front. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a glass formed in the shape of a picture frame attached to the game frame so as to be openable and closable. It has a door frame 2.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame there is an upper tray forming a batted ball supply tray 3. At the bottom of the batted ball supply tray 3, there is a surplus ball tray 4 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 3, and a surplus ball tray 4 for storing game balls as a game medium that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 3, and a surplus ball tray 4 for storing game balls as a game medium that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 3, and a surplus ball tray 4 for storing game balls as a game medium that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 3. A ball hitting operation handle 5 to be operated is provided. The ball-hitting operation handle 5 is also referred to as an operation knob. At the back of the glass door frame 2, a game board 6 is removably attached, in which a game area 7 is formed into which a game ball that has been hit can flow down. A large number of game nails are planted in the game area 7. In the game area 7 of FIG. 1, some of the game nails are shown. The batting ball firing device is driven by a firing motor, and the force for hitting the game ball (launching strength) is adjusted according to the rotational operation position of the batting operation handle 5. This allows the player to shoot the game ball at a desired location in the game area 7.

Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 is provided that can variably display (also referred to as variable display or simply variable) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. In the gaming area 7, the first path among the downstream paths along which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front, and the first path among the downstream paths along which the game ball flows down A second route different from the first route is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second route is called right-handed hitting. The first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the left side of the game area 7, so it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area 7, so it may be called a right-handed route.

Note that the first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the arrangement of game nails, or the like.

A game ball fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area 7 in response to the operation of the ball operation handle 5 is guided, for example, along an array of game nails when guided to the left game area. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the player to the right gaming area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area because it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A first start prize opening 13 is provided in the left game area of the game area 7 as a structure into which the game balls that have been hit can enter. The first starting prize opening 13 is arranged below the effect display device 9. The first starting winning opening 13 is provided with a first starting winning opening switch 13a inside as a switch for detecting the game ball that has entered.

A gate 32, a variable winning ball device 15, and a V judgment winning device 87 are provided as structures into which the game balls that have been distributed into the right gaming area of the gaming area 7 can enter. The V judgment winning device 87 is also referred to as a V winning device. The variable winning ball device 15 has a second starting winning hole 14 in which game balls can be won. In addition, as a switch for detecting the game ball that has entered each, a gate switch 32a is installed inside the gate 32, a second starting winning opening switch 14a is installed inside the second starting winning opening 14, and a V judgment winning device. A V winning switch 87a, a V judging winning switch 15a, and a V judging discharge switch 15b are provided inside the box 87, respectively. Hereinafter, the winning (entering) of a game ball into the first starting prize opening 13 will also be referred to as a first starting winning, and the winning (entering) of a gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 14 will also be referred to as a second starting winning.

The first starting winning hole 13 serves as a starting winning device for starting a variable display (variable display) of a first special symbol as a variable display means (variable display means), into which a game ball (starting winning ball) enters (wins a prize). ) is a possible winning opening structure. The second starting winning hole 14 serves as a starting winning device for starting a variable display (variable display) of a second special symbol as a variable display means (variable display means), into which a game ball (starting winning ball) enters (wins a prize). ) is a possible winning opening structure.

The gate 32 is a gate structure through which game balls can enter (pass through). When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The normal design will be described later. In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening 13 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening 13, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Moreover, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning hole 14 and gate 32 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 14 and the gate 32, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that it may be arranged so that there is a possibility that the game ball that has been hit into the right game area will enter the first starting prize opening 13, but from the viewpoint of playability, this possibility is not possible if the game ball is hit into the left game area. It is desirable that the probability of a game ball entering them is extremely low. On the other hand, it may be possible to make it possible for the game balls that are hit in the left game area to enter the gate 32 and the second starting prize opening 14, but from the viewpoint of playability, this possibility is limited to the right side. It is desirable to make the probability extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls that are divided into the game areas will enter them.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for determining the V winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a jackpot when a small hit occurs. A small win is a win in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 opens as a predetermined value award.

The V judgment prize winning device 87 is formed of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually check the game ball passing through the inside. The V judgment winning device 87 has a width at the top that allows the game ball to pass in the front and back direction, and walls on both sides (the front side and the back side) of the passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right direction. A guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, when a small hit occurs, a signal is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 open periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + end period 1 second). By repeating opening and closing, an operating opening is formed as an opening through which a total of about 10 or more game balls can be won within a predetermined period of time when the opening is open. The path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball so as to protrude alternately on both sides of the wall, so that when hitting right-handed, , A structure (deceleration structure) in which the game balls flow slowly is formed in the passage above the operating port on the upper part of the V judgment winning device 87.

In the small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V judgment winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Opening control is executed. In the V judgment winning device 87, the portion of the guideway where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. A movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guideway, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guideway and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens in the guideway, so the game ball guided to the guideway can fall from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become. The operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is provided separately from the big winning hole of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and also serves as a V big winning hole as a second big winning hole. Further, the V judgment winning device 87 is also referred to as a V winning device or a V attacker.

Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 into which game balls can enter from the operating opening, the V-judgment winning region 870, which is a specific area, is located at the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-judgment winning device 87, as a winning region where game balls can win. Further, a ramp 871 is provided which guides all the game balls entering from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning part into which a game ball can enter, and can guide the game ball entering from the V winning part downward.

A plate-shaped opening/closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state is provided at the top end of the V winning area 870, which is the winning part. ing. The opening/closing member is driven by the solenoid 24 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning part. In the state where the V winning part is opened depending on the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 is in a state where it can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the V winning part is closed due to the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. The game ball is placed in a state where it can fall into the winning ball area where it can be guided downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small winning game state in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, one game ball is When entering the V winning area 870 and winning a prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a provided in the V winning area 870. In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball that has been guided onto the V winning area 870 from then on is placed in the winning ball area. will be entering. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V judgment winning switch 15b provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball that enters the V judgment winning device 87 from the operating port in the small winning game state is detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment winning switch 15b. Detected.

When the total number of balls detected by the V-winning switch 15a and the V-judgment winning switch 15b reaches 10, the V-judgment winning device 87, whose operating opening is open in the small winning game state, closes its operating opening and starts playing the game. The ball is said to be inaccessible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge at the bottom, and the gaming balls that have passed through the merged discharge passage and entered the inside of the V judgment winning device 87 enter the inside of the game board 6. It is discharged into a predetermined discharge path. The discharge passage is provided with a V judgment discharge switch capable of detecting discharged game balls, and all discharged game balls are detected by the switch. When a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined valid period. , the conditions for generating a jackpot are satisfied, and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, during the period when a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, on average a total of about 10 game balls win a V judgment prize without requiring any special operation. The structure and controls are designed to allow entry into the device 87. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the V judgment winning device 87, the structure is designed so that the game ball always (100%) enters the V winning area 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-hitting promotion notification that instructs the player to hit the right-hand ball is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. Ru. Therefore, when a small hit occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operating port in the V judgment prize winning device 87, and unless the player hits the ball left-handed, the player must hit right-handed. If so, the game ball will definitely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the V judgment winning device 87 was provided with a structure for decelerating the game ball. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operating port that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path for the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small hit game state. In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operating port is opened 10 times.

A part of the front side of the V judgment winning device 87 is provided with a V lamp 875, which is a light emitting body made of an LED shaped like the letter "V". The V lamp 875 basically emits white light when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 in the small winning game state. For example, the V lamp 875 can basically emit white light, but the emitted color can change to blue, red, and rainbow colors depending on the effect depending on the gaming situation, such as when notifying a player on hold. It is. It should be noted that the V lamp 875 may be provided on the front part of the V judgment winning device 87, or may be provided inside the V judgment winning device 87, as long as it is at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Further, the V lamp 875 may be provided at a different position from the V judgment winning device 87 (for example, a position near the V judgment winning device 87).

The variable winning ball device 15 has a state (open state) that is advantageous for a player who can enter the second starting winning opening 14 with a game ball, and a disadvantageous state for a player who cannot enter the second starting winning opening 14 with a gaming ball. It is a variable winning ball device that changes between the open state (closed state) and the entrance part has tulip-shaped open wings (a pair of left and right shapes). A stopper member is provided to restrict the entry of game balls in this state. This unfolding blade is driven by a solenoid 16. The variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player by opening for a certain period of time (for example, one second) when the display result of the normal symbol becomes a win. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win a prize, it is possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning hole 13 and the second starting winning hole 14 may be collectively referred to as starting winning hole or starting opening.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 15 and the V judgment winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 15 and the V judgment winning device 87, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that it may be arranged so that there is a possibility that the game balls hit into the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 15 or the V judgment winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of playability, It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls that are distributed into the right game area will enter them.

On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display that variably displays a first special symbol serves as a variable display means that variably displays special symbols as multiple types of identification information that can be identified. A second special symbol display device 8a and a second special symbol display device 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol are provided. Both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are included in the special symbol. Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a simple and small-sized display (for example, a 7-segment LED) that can variably display numbers, letters, and other symbols. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD). On the display screen of the effect display device 9, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, various images such as the variable display of the effect symbol are displayed as multiple types of identification information that can each be identified. A display area is provided. Such a display area includes, for example, a pattern display area (symbol display area) that variably displays three decorative (direction) production patterns (also called decorative patterns): "left," "middle," and "right." is formed.

Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board (game control board) 31. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. When the first special symbol display 8a is performing a variable display of the first special symbol, the performance display device 9 executes a performance display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8b displays the second special symbol. When the variable display of the special symbols is being executed, if the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, the progress of the game can be easily grasped. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display ( (variable display section).

Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may include only one special symbol display. If only one special symbol display device is provided, only one starting winning hole may be provided. In addition, even if only one special symbol display device is provided, two (multiple) starting winning holes are provided, and when a game ball wins in any of the starting winning holes, one special symbol display device is provided. Control may be performed to display the information in a variable manner. In addition, when two (plural) special symbol displays are provided, one starting prize opening is provided, and the two special symbol displays are displayed variably in a predetermined order (for example, they are displayed variably every time a starting prize is won). (such as switching the special symbol display) may also be controlled.

A jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the gaming area 7. The jackpot variable prize winning ball device 20 is arranged at a position where a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Further, the jackpot variable prize winning ball device 20 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state in which the game nail is planted.

The variable jackpot winning ball device 20 has a jackpot whose front face is covered with a rectangular door. When a jackpot occurs, the solenoid 21 causes the door to tilt forward about the base, revealing the jackpot. (opens the mouth). Inside the jackpot variable prize winning ball device 20, a count switch 23 is provided for detecting the game ball that has entered. The winning route to the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is set by game nails and other structures so that the game ball can enter the jackpot only when the game ball is hit into the right gaming area. Limited. It should be noted that it may be arranged so that a prize can be won in the big winning hole regardless of whether the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area.

When a game ball wins in any of the first starting winning hole 13, second starting winning hole 14, jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and V judgment winning device 87, a predetermined number of winning balls are determined according to each. will be paid out. Note that the prize ball may also be paid out when the game ball passes through the gate 32. Further, even if a game ball wins, a prize ball may not be paid out from at least one of the first starting winning hole 13 and the second starting winning hole 14.

At the bottom of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which the batted balls that do not win are taken in. Additionally, four speakers 27 are provided at the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right outside of the game area 7 to emit sound effects and voices as predetermined audio output. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Occurs in When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the first starting winning hole 13, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the second starting winning hole 14, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In this way, it is possible to indicate that a jackpot game state will occur based on the display result of the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. ”.

A jackpot also occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 while the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small winning gaming state. When a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, it is called a V winning. When a small hit occurs, a jackpot can occur on the condition that the player wins a V prize. The small hit game state is a game state in which the operating port opens in the V judgment winning device 87 when a small win occurs. In the small hit game state, a jackpot that occurs based on a game ball winning a V prize is referred to as a "jackpot via a small hit" or "a jackpot via a small win."

The jackpot gaming state is a specific gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value provision. In the jackpot game state, repeated continuous control may be performed in which the jackpot of the variable jackpot winning ball device 20 repeats an open state and a closed state a predetermined number of times. In the jackpot game state, repeated and continuous control is performed in which the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87, which is a V winning device, is set as the V jackpot, and the V jackpot may repeat an open state and a closed state a predetermined number of times. . In the repeated continuous control, a state in which the big winning hole of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is open and a state in which the V big winning hole of the V judgment winning device 87 is open is called a round. Repeated continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, when the jackpot of the variable jackpot winning ball device 20 is opened, the jackpot is closed when a predetermined condition for ending the open state is satisfied. The condition for ending the open state of the grand prize opening is when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened, or when a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, 9 balls) have been generated. In some cases, the opening end condition may be set to be satisfied. When the continuation right occurs when the conditions for ending the opening of the jackpot hole are satisfied, the jackpot variable jackpot ball device 20 is opened again. The right to continue the round in which the jackpot of the variable jackpot winning ball device 20 is opened is repeatedly generated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit (eighth round or 10th round). It is possible.

In the jackpot game state, when the V big prize opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is brought into the open state, the V big winning mouth is brought into the closed state in response to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition for ending the open state. The condition for ending the open state of the V major winning hole as the second major winning hole is when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed after the V major winning hole was opened, or a predetermined number of prizes (for example, 10 It is sufficient that the opening end condition is set to be satisfied when a winning ball of 1) is generated. Some or all of the opening end conditions may be different between the open state in the big winning hole and the open state in the V big winning hole, or some or all of the conditions may be the same. . In the case where the condition for ending the opening of the V big winning opening is satisfied, if the continuation right occurs, the operating opening that becomes the V big winning opening is opened again in the V judgment winning device 87, which is the V winning device. . The right to continue the round in which the V big prize opening of the V winning machine is opened can be repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit (5th round or 10th round). be. The number of openings to reach the final round may be partly or completely different depending on when the big winning hole is open and when the V big winning hole is open. may be common.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition of the variable display after the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied, When a variable display time such as a special symbol variation time has elapsed, a confirmed special symbol which is a final stop symbol is derived as a display result. The first starting condition is a first execution condition corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and is based on, for example, the occurrence of a first starting winning in which a game ball passes through the first starting winning opening 13 as a starting winning area. It is possible to establish this. The second starting condition is a second execution condition corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and is based on, for example, the occurrence of a second starting winning in which the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening 14 as the starting winning area. It is possible to establish this. The start condition for the variable display can be satisfied, for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed and the jackpot game is not being executed. The passage of the game ball is the passage of the game ball through an area predetermined as a winning area, such as a winning opening or a gate, and is a concept that includes winning by the game ball entering the winning opening. Further, the derivation of the display result refers to a final display in which the display pattern as identification information is finally stopped and displayed.

Regarding the variable display in which the starting conditions have not yet been met even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning hole 13 and the second starting winning hole 14, the starting condition has not yet been established within the predetermined upper limit number. Stores information regarding variable displays for which conditions are not met. The storage of information regarding such a variable display is called pending storage. The term "suspended storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been stored. Pending memory is also called starting memory or starting winnings memory.

Regarding the first special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the first pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 13. Regarding the second special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the second pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 14. If a jackpot occurs in a state where such first pending memory or second pending memory exists, the pending memory that existed before the jackpot occurrence will be maintained as it is, and the variable display will be displayed after the jackpot gaming state ends. used for.

When a second starting prize enters the second starting winning hole 14, even if there is already a pending memory of the first starting winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning takes priority. is executed. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display 8b and the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second display consisting of one display that displays the effective number of winning balls that entered the second starting winning hole 14, that is, the number of second reserved memory. A special symbol retention storage display 18b is provided. The second special symbol retention memory display 18b lights up the second special symbol retention memory display 18b every time there is a valid starting winning, and each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b starts. The second special symbol retention storage display 18b is turned off. Further above the second special symbol retention memory display 18b, there is a first special symbol retention memory display consisting of four displays that display the effective number of winning balls that entered the first starting winning hole 13, that is, the first retention memory number. A container 18a is provided. The first special symbol retention storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 every time there is a valid starting winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit displays is reduced by one.

On the left side of the performance display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 is provided which variably displays distinguishable normal symbols. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display, such as a 7-segment LED, which can variably display numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers or symbols from 0 to 9. Further, the small display device is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32, a variable display of the display on the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol included in the winning symbols, such as symbol "7", it becomes a win, and the variable winning ball device 15 changes from the closed state disadvantageous for the player to the predetermined time. It changes to an open state that is advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol retention storage display 41 is provided which has a display section with four LEDs that displays the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32. Every time a game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol retention storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 starts, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by one.

A stick controller 122 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. The stick controller 122 can be held by the player and tilted in multiple directions, for example, forward, backward, left, and right. The stick controller 122 is provided with a trigger button 125, and a trigger sensor 121 is built inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. The trigger button 125 is used to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing or pulling the trigger button 125 with a predetermined operating finger such as an index finger while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand such as the left hand. is possible. The trigger sensor 121 is capable of detecting a player's action, such as a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation on the trigger button 125. A tilting direction sensor unit 123 is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the bottom of the stick controller 122, and a vibrator motor 126 is built into the stick controller 122. The tilting direction sensor unit 123 is capable of detecting a player's movement, such as a tilting operation on a control stick. The vibrator motor 126 is an eccentric motor for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

A push button 120 is provided on a member forming the hit ball supply tray 3 in the upper tray of the pachinko game machine 1. The push button 120 is arranged at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body, for example, above the stick controller 122, and allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the push button or the like. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. A push sensor 124 is provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the location where the push button 120 is installed. The push sensor 124 is capable of detecting a player's action, such as a pressing operation on the push button 120.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game state and presentation state are controlled so that the player can enjoy a variety of games by firing game balls according to the game situation. The player only needs to be able to use either "left-handed" aiming at the left gaming area or "right-handed hitting" aiming at the right gaming area as the game ball firing according to the gaming situation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Below, the flow of the game after the player starts playing the game on the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

When a player takes a seat at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 13 by hitting the ball to the left. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot due to the special symbol), the game is performed by switching from left-handed to right-handed batting and aiming at the jackpot variable prize winning ball device 20 that is released. . After the jackpot game state ends, a right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the performance display device 9 to urge the player to play the game by hitting right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. The right-handed hitting promotion notification is also referred to as the right-handed hitting notification.

During the jackpot game state, a game is performed in which the player aims at the jackpot of the open jackpot variable winning ball device 20 or the V jackpot of the V judgment winning device 87 by hitting right. During the jackpot game state, right-handed hitting promotion notification is performed. After the end of the jackpot game state, if a special state is reached, the player continues to play the game by hitting right. After the end of the jackpot game, if the special state has been reached, a special state start notification is made on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the special state will start. In addition, during the special state, right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed. After the special state ends, the right-hand hitting promotion notification that is executed during the special state ends, and the player switches from right-handed hitting to left-handed hitting and plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 13. . Note that when the special state ends, a left-handed game promotion notification may be made on the screen of the performance display device 9 to urge the player to return to left-handed game mode and play the game. The left-handed batting promotion notification is also referred to as the left-handed batting notification.

During the special state after the end of the jackpot game, the player plays the game by hitting right to aim at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning hole 14. When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 14 and the display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot with a special symbol), the player plays the game aiming at the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 or the V judgment winning device 87 while hitting the right hand. In addition, if a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 14 and the display result becomes a small winning symbol, which is the small winning display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in the small winning gaming state. Aim for the V judgment winning device 87 while hitting the right hand and play the game. At the start of the small win game state, a small win start notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small win game state is started. In addition, when the small win game state is controlled, for example, the start timing of the small win display that is executed before the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the small win, or the small win display is executed. Right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed at a specific timing depending on the game situation, such as a predetermined timing before the game is played.

When the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is in an open state due to the small winning gaming state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V judgment winning device 87, enters the V winning region 870, and is detected. When a V-win occurs, a jackpot via a small hit occurs. When a V winning prize occurs, a V winning notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that a V winning prize has occurred. Further, when the small winning game state ends, a small winning end notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small hit ends, the jackpot game state is entered and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 or the V judgment winning device 87 is released, so the player can continue hitting the right hand with the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 or the V judgment winning device. Aim for 87 and play the game.

When playing a game aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning gaming state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a jackpot occurs. do not. In this way, when a V winning does not occur during the small winning game state, a V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the V winning has failed. Furthermore, at the end of the small winning game state, a small winning end notification is made on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small winning game state ends, while the special state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable prize winning ball device 15 while hitting right. When the special state ends, the player switches from right-handed to left-handed and plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 13. At the end of the special state, a time saving end notification to notify that the time saving has ended is performed on the screen of the performance display device 9, and a left-handed playing promotion notification to urge the player to return to left-handed playing and play the game.

FIG. 2 shows a hit type table. The hit type table shows the win occurrence conditions, post-win control state, number of openings, etc. for each win type. The post-win control state is a gaming state that can be controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. The number of openings indicates the number of times a round is executed as a jackpot game, including the opening time in each round. In the hit type table shown in Figure 2, the winning types are 1st special jackpot A, 1st special jackpot B, 1st special jackpot C, 2nd special jackpot, jackpot X via small hit, jackpot via small hit. Y, small win via jackpot Z are provided.

A small hit occurs when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning hole 14 provided in the variable winning ball device 15 and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. A determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be made into a small hit symbol is made in advance by random number lottery (small win determination of special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings is 10 times and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The gaming state controlled after the end of the small winning gaming state is the same as before the small winning unless it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. During the small winning game state, prize balls are paid out according to the game balls that have entered the inside of the V judgment winning device 87. When the display result of a special symbol does not become a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes a losing symbol.

When the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened due to a small hit, a game ball is entered into the operating port and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning), A jackpot occurs via a small hit. Jackpots via small hits include jackpots via small hits It will be done. In the jackpot X via small win, it is possible to execute a round in which the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a V large winning hole in the jackpot game state, and the number of rounds is 10. The small hit in jackpot X via small win is also referred to as the first small hit. In the jackpot Y via small hit, it is possible to execute a round in which the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a V large winning hole in the jackpot game state, and the number of rounds is 10. The small hit in jackpot Y via small win is also referred to as the second small hit. The jackpot Z via small win can execute a round in which the big winning hole of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the jackpot game state, and the number of rounds is 5. The small hit in the jackpot Z via the small hit is also called the third small hit. In the "Number of openings" in FIG. 2, the case where the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in response to a small hit gaming state is indicated by "V winning device", and the case where the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in response to a small winning gaming state is indicated by "V winning device". The case where the operating port 87 is opened as a V big winning hole is shown as "V big winning hole".

A jackpot that occurs directly due to the variable display of a special symbol without going through a small hit is also called a symbol jackpot. The symbol jackpot includes a first special symbol jackpot A, a first special symbol jackpot B, a first special symbol jackpot C, and a first special symbol jackpot C, depending on the jackpot game state that can be controlled based on the variable display of the first special symbol. 2. A second special symbol jackpot is included depending on the jackpot game state that can be controlled based on the variable display of the special symbol.

The jackpots include a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a jackpot that occurs via a small hit that occurs due to V winning via a small win that is based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. and is included. Each of the symbol jackpot and the small hit via jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a special state after the end of the jackpot game state. The advantageous state that is advantageous for the player includes opening of the big winning hole of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 in the jackpot gaming state, and opening of the operating hole of the V judgment winning device 87 as a V big winning hole. It is fine as long as it is.

The special state is an example of a game state that is different from the jackpot game state among the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player. In the special state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the variable winning ball device 15 is increased to facilitate winning into the second starting winning hole 14 (high High-base control is performed to increase the number of approaches (increasing the number of approaches and increasing the frequency). The "base" is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in response to winnings to the number of fired balls. Active control to increase this ratio is "high base control." A state in which high base control is performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which high base control is not performed is also referred to as a low base state. The high base control is realized, for example, as control that increases the occurrence of a starting prize that triggers the start of fluctuation of the special symbols. For this purpose, by increasing the opening frequency and the number of openings of the variable winning ball device 15 (so-called electric tulip), or by lengthening the opening time of one time, the second starting winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. This can be realized as a control that facilitates the winning of 14. The control that makes it easy for the variable winning ball device 15 to be in the open state and for the game ball to easily pass through the second starting winning hole 14 is also called electric chew support control or electric support. In the high base state, by increasing the frequency that the variable winning ball device 15, which is the trigger for changing the special symbol, is in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the variable winning ball device 15 will be made easier (higher entry rate, higher frequency).

As the high base control and the electric chew support control, some or all of the normal symbol shortening control, normal symbol probability changing control, opening time extension control, and opening frequency increasing control is performed. The normal symbol shortening control is a control that shortens the variation time from the start of variable display of normal symbols to the time of deriving and displaying the display result to derive and display the display result at an early stage. The normal symbol probability variation control is a control that increases the probability that a stopped symbol of a normal symbol becomes a winning symbol. The open time extension control is a control that lengthens the open time of the variable winning ball device 15, which is normally an electric accessory. The opening number increase control is a control that increases the number of openings of the variable winning ball device 15, which is a trigger for changing the special symbol. When such control is performed, the proportion of time that the variable winning ball device 15, which triggers the change of special symbols, is in the open state is higher than when no control is performed, so it is easier for game balls to start winning. Become.

The post-win control state of the first special symbol jackpot A can continue the special state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The post-win control state of the first special symbol jackpot B can continue the special state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 15 times. The post-win control state of the first special symbol jackpot C can continue the special state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed three times. The post-win control state of the second special symbol jackpot can continue the special state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The control state after the hit of the jackpot X via the small hit can continue to be the special state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The post-win control state of the jackpot Y via small hit can continue to be the special state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 15 times. The post-win control state of the jackpot Z via small win can continue to be the special state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 15 times. In this way, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of times the special symbol can be changed and displayed in the special state is set to the number of times depending on the type of hit, such as 3 times, 15 times, or 100 times. . If a jackpot occurs based on the fluctuating display of special symbols before the special state ends, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the special state will continue until the number of times the special symbol fluctuates according to the winning type is reached. becomes controllable.

In the setting of the winning type shown in FIG. 2, when the winning type is the 1st special drawing jackpot B, when the winning type is the 1st special drawing jackpot C, when the winning type is in the special state as the post-win control state. Since the number of executable variable displays increases, a jackpot advantageous to the player occurs. When the winning type is the 1st special jackpot A, the post-win control state is in a special state than when the winning type is either the 1st special jackpot B or the 1st special jackpot C. Since the number of variable displays that can be executed increases, a jackpot advantageous to the player occurs. In this way, the jackpot gaming states that can be controlled in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are, for example, the jackpot gaming state that is the first advantageous state, such as the jackpot gaming state in the case of the first special drawing jackpot C, and the jackpot gaming state that is the first advantageous state, and the jackpot gaming state in the case of the first special drawing jackpot A. , and the first special figure jackpot B, which is a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state.

In the special state, time saving control may be performed in which the variation time of special symbols, performance symbols, etc. is shorter than in the normal state. On the other hand, the time saving control may not be performed in the special state. While high base control and electric chew support control are performed in the special state, time saving control is not performed, so even if the number of variable displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the special state is small, such as 3 times, Also, it is possible to secure a sufficient period during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state and the game ball easily passes through the second starting winning hole 14, and the player can enter the game ball into the second starting winning hole 14 by hitting right. This makes it easier for the ball to pass through. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of 1/15. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the possibility of generating a jackpot via a small hit is greatly increased compared to a jackpot due to the variable display of the first special symbol or a second special symbol jackpot. With such a setting, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win. In the special state, the firing of the game ball toward the second starting prize opening 14 is promoted by hitting the ball to the right, making it possible to realize a different gaming experience from that in the normal state.

The first starting prize opening 13 is provided so that prizes can be won from the first route. In the normal state, which is a low base state, high base control and electric chew support control are not performed, so it is better for the game ball to flow down the first route than to have the game ball flow down the second route. This is advantageous for the player. The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 and the V judgment winning device 87 are provided so as to be able to win from the second route. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot variable jackpot winning ball device 20's jackpot and the V judgment winning device 87's V jackpot opening are opened, so if the game ball flows down the second path, the This is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a jackpot than when the game ball flows down one path. During the small hit gaming state, the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, so it is better for the game ball to flow down the second path than the game ball to flow down the first path in terms of the occurrence of a jackpot. This is advantageous for the player. In addition to this comparison of advantages, from other points of view, it is more advantageous for the player to have the game media flow down the first route in normal conditions, and it is more advantageous for the player to have the game media flow down the second route in other gaming conditions. A configuration may be adopted in which it is more advantageous for the player if the medium flows downward. For example, other winning openings are provided in the first route and the second route, and in the low base state as the normal state, it is easier to win in the first route than in the second route, and the winning opening is higher. In other states such as the base state, the jackpot gaming state, and the small winning gaming state, a configuration may be adopted in which it is easier to win the variable prize opening in the second route than in the first route. Other winning holes may be other variable winning holes that may be for starting winnings or non-starting winnings.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration on the main board (gaming control board) 31. In addition, FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the production control board 80, etc. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 that stores programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I/O port section. Contains 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer with a built-in ROM 54 and RAM 55. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a built-in random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are saved for a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period during which the contents of the RAM 55 can be saved may be the period from when the power supply is stopped until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source becomes unable to supply power. At least data such as the special symbol process flag, which corresponds to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, when the game control microcomputer 560 or the CPU 56 executes control or processes, specifically, the CPU 56 executes the control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the main board 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate random numbers for determination. The random number for determination is used to determine whether or not it is a jackpot or small hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data within the numerical range in which the initial value and the upper limit are set, according to the set update rule. The initial value of the numerical data may be 0, for example. The upper limit value of the numerical data may be, for example, 65535. In the random number circuit 503, the read numerical data becomes a random numerical value based on the fact that the starting winning time, which occurs at random timing, is the time of reading (extracting) numerical data. In this way, the random number circuit 503 has a random number generation function by updating and reading numerical data. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

An input driver circuit 58 and an output circuit 59 are mounted on the main board 31. The input driver circuit 58 receives detection signals from each of the gate switch 32a, the first starting winning port switch 13a, the second starting winning port switch 14a, the V winning switch 87a, the V judgment winning switch 15a, and the V judgment discharge switch 15b. is given to the game control microcomputer 560. The output circuit 59 includes a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15, a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a solenoid 22 that opens and closes the V judgment winning device 87 (movable part 872), and a solenoid 22 that opens and closes the V judgment winning device 87 (movable part 872). The solenoid 22 that opens and closes the device 87 (area 870 movable part 87) and the solenoid 24 that opens and closes the V winning area 870 (opening and closing member) are driven in accordance with instructions from the game control microcomputer 560. The payout control board 37 controls the payout of balls by controlling the ball payout device 97.

The game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a that variably displays special symbols, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol storage display. 18a, controls the display of the second special symbol retention storage display 18b and the normal symbol retention storage display 41.

The production control board 80 is equipped with a production control microcomputer 100, ROM 102, RAM 103, VDP 109, I/O port section 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. RAM 103 is used as a work memory. ROM102 and RAM103 may be built in microcomputer 100 for production control. The VDP 109 performs display control of the performance display device 9 in cooperation with the performance control microcomputer 100.

The production control microcomputer 100 receives production control commands from the game control microcomputer 560 to instruct production content via a relay board 77 that allows signals to pass only in one direction from the main board 31 to the production control board 80. In addition to controlling the variable display of the effect display device 9, it also controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side and the V lamp 875 via the lamp driver board 35, and also controls the display of the V lamp 875. Various production controls such as controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 are performed via the speaker 70.

The performance control CPU 101 receives operation detection signals from the trigger sensor 121, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, and the push sensor 124 via the I/O port section 105. The operation detection signal from the trigger sensor 121 is an information signal indicating detection of an operation performed by the player, such as a push/pull operation on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122. The operation detection signal from the tilting direction sensor unit 123 is an information signal indicating the detection of an operation performed by the player, such as a tilting operation on the operation column of the stick controller 122. The operation detection signal from the push sensor 124 is an information signal indicating the detection of an operation, such as a pressing action on the push button 120, which is an operation action by the player. The performance control CPU 101 causes the stick controller 122 to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I/O port section 105.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, update range, purpose, and addition condition are shown. As the types of random numbers shown in FIG. 4, random R and random 1 to 5 are provided. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: This is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot and whether or not to win a small hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1: Type of hit (win type, any type from 1st special jackpot A to 1st special jackpot C, jackpot X via small hit to jackpot Z via small hit) and jackpot symbol or small hit Determine the symbol (for determining the winning type and determining the winning symbol). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern). (4) Random 3: Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 4 (for determining the initial value of Random 4).

The jackpot based on the first special symbol includes jackpots in a plurality of winning types, such as the first special symbol jackpot A to the first special symbol jackpot C. The small wins based on the second special symbol include small wins in a plurality of winning types, such as jackpot X via small win to jackpot Z via small win. Based on the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination, when a jackpot is determined by the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, or a jackpot or small hit is determined by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. In this case, the winning type is determined to be one of the winning types based on the value of random 1, which is a random number for determining the winning type. In the case of a jackpot via a small hit, if a V-win does not occur, the determined jackpot will be invalidated. When the winning type is determined, a confirmed special symbol that becomes a jackpot symbol or a small winning symbol is determined based on the value of random 1, which is a random number for determining the winning type. First, the fluctuation pattern type is determined using random number 2, which is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and then one of the fluctuation pattern types included in the determined fluctuation pattern type is determined using random number 3, which is the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type. Decide on a fluctuating pattern. The fluctuation pattern is determined by such a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve a reach, and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves a reach. The variation pattern type is set so that when the display result is a failure, the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is set to be different depending on whether it is in a special state or not. , it becomes possible to select a different variation pattern than when not in a special state.

The variation pattern types include a variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs, and a variation pattern type that cannot be selected when a small win occurs. For example, a variation pattern type in which a performance that is related to a small win is executed and a variation pattern type in which a performance that is not related to a small win is executed may be prepared in advance. The variation pattern types that can be selected when a small hit occurs may include a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion performance regarding a small win is executed. When such a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding a small win is executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectations. The variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs may be selectable both when a small hit occurs and when a small hit does not occur. The variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs may be selectable both when a small hit occurs and when a jackpot occurs. As a result, even if the variation pattern type is selectable when a small win occurs, there may be times when the small win does not occur, so the player is aware in advance that a small win will result from the type of variation pattern executed. You can prevent it from being stored away. On the other hand, types of fluctuation patterns that cannot be selected when a small hit occurs are, for example, fluctuation patterns that have no relation to the small hit, such as those that imply a direct jackpot without going through the small hit. By making it impossible to select when a small hit occurs, it is possible to prevent the relationship between the performance of the fluctuating pattern and the display result from becoming complicated. The variable pattern that can be selected when a small hit occurs may be set such that one set at a specific variable time is selected based on the correspondence with the opening control of the V judgment winning device 87. If such a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion performance regarding a small win is executed can be executed when a small win occurs, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for a small win when the variation is displayed. can. Furthermore, the player can easily play the game peculiar to the small hit game state, in which the game ball needs to enter the V judgment winning device 87 within a predetermined period in order to win the jackpot. It becomes possible to make it difficult for a player to escape an advantageous state in which a game ball enters the V judgment winning device 87.

The variation pattern that can be selected when a small hit occurs does not have to be one in which a predetermined suggestion performance regarding a small hit is executed. Variation patterns may be provided separately for when it is a small hit, when it is a miss, and when it is a jackpot. The fluctuation pattern is not divided into small hits, misses, and jackpots, and the range of the type of fluctuation pattern to be selected is determined regardless of the fluctuation display result. may be made to be the same. Instead of setting the variation pattern type and variation pattern separately and determining the variation pattern through a two-step lottery process, the variation pattern is determined in one step by using only random numbers for determining the variation pattern without setting the variation pattern type. A pattern may also be determined.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the first special figure hit determination table, the second special figure hit determination table, the first special figure jackpot type determination table, the second special figure jackpot type determination table, and the small hit via jackpot determination table. It is. These tables are stored in the ROM 54. The first special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5(A) is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol. The second special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5(B) is a data table for making jackpot determination and small hit determination for the second special symbol. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5(C) is a data table for determining the hit type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5(D) is a data table for determining the hit type when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. The small hit via jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5(E) is a data table for determining the hit type when a small hit is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure hit determination table only needs to have a jackpot determination value set therein to be compared with the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination. The jackpot probability based on the setting of the jackpot determination value in the first special symbol hit determination table indicates the proportion of the jackpot in the variable display of the first special symbol. The second special figure hit determination table only needs to have a jackpot determination value and a small hit determination value set therein, which are compared with the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination. The jackpot probability based on the setting of the jackpot determination value in the second special symbol hit determination table indicates the proportion of the jackpot in the variable display of the second special symbol. The small hit probability based on the setting of the small hit determination value in the second special symbol hit determination table indicates the proportion of small hits in the variable display of the second special symbol.

When a first starting prize, which is a starting winning to the first starting winning hole 13, or a second starting winning, which is a starting winning to the second starting winning hole 14, is detected, the CPU 56 generates a random number at a predetermined timing. A random R count value is extracted from the circuit 503. For the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the first special symbol. decided on. Regarding the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the second special symbol. decided on. In this case, if the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and if the extracted value does not match any of the small hit judgment values. If it matches the value, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. The decision to make it a small win means a tentative decision to make it a jackpot via a small win. In the case of a small hit, it will not be controlled as a jackpot unless a V-win occurs, so although a jackpot can occur, it is a tentative determination that the jackpot has not yet been determined.

The decision as to whether or not to make it a jackpot includes the decision as to whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state and the decision as to whether or not to make the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol a jackpot symbol. , contains. The decision as to whether or not to make a small win includes the decision as to whether or not to shift to the small win gaming state and the decision as to whether or not to make the stop symbol by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol a small win symbol. I'm here. Although the first special symbol is set not to be determined as a small hit, the first special symbol may be set so as to be determined as a small hit with a predetermined probability.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table, the second special figure jackpot determination table, and the small hit via jackpot determination table each have a hit type determination value that is compared with the value of random 1, which is a random number for determining the hit type. Bye. The winning type determination value in the first special figure jackpot type determination table may be set corresponding to each of the first special figure jackpot A to first special figure jackpot C. In the first special pattern jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The winning type determination value is set so that the first special drawing jackpot C is determined at a ratio of /100. The winning type determination value in the second special figure jackpot type determination table should just be set corresponding to the second special figure jackpot. In the second special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5(D), the hit type determination value is set so that the second special figure jackpot is determined at a ratio of 100/100. The winning type determination values in the small winning via jackpot type determination table may be set corresponding to each of the small winning via jackpot X to the small winning via jackpot Z. In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5(E), jackpot X via small hit is determined at a ratio of 30/100, jackpot Y via small hit is determined at a ratio of 35/100, and jackpot Y via small hit is determined at a ratio of 35/100. The hit type determination value is set so that a small hit via jackpot Z is determined based on the ratio.

The hit type determination value is also used as a determination value for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol or small win symbol of the second special symbol. Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 56 determines the hit type corresponding to the hit type determination value with the matching value of random 1 as the hit type, and also determines the hit type corresponding to the hit type determination value with the matching random 1 value, and also determines the hit type that corresponds to the hit type determination value with the matching value of random 1, and selects the random as the jackpot symbol or the small win symbol. A jackpot symbol or a small win symbol with a matching value of 1 is determined. Thereby, the winning type and the jackpot symbol or small winning symbol corresponding to the winning type may be determined at the same time.

The game control microcomputer 560 transmits various performance control commands to the performance control microcomputer 100 depending on the game control state. The multiple types of production control commands that can be transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 include, for example, a variation pattern command, a display result specification command, a first symbol variation specification command, a second symbol variation specification command, a symbol confirmation specification command, and a winning start command. Specified command, specified command while opening the big winning hole, specified command after opening the big winning hole, winning end specified command, 1st starting winning specifying command, 2nd starting winning specifying command, normal state specifying command, special state specifying command, 1st One of the pending memory number designation command, second pending memory number designation command, symbol designation command, variation type command, small hit start designation command, small hit end designation command, V winning prize designation command, and V judgment winning ball detection command. It is sufficient to include some or all commands.

The variation pattern command specifies a variation pattern that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variably displayed special symbol. For example, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, it is sufficient if there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. The variation pattern command is also a command for specifying the start of variation, and the performance control CPU 101 that receives the variation pattern command controls the performance display device 9 to start a performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. The display result designation command specifies a display result including a loss display result, a jackpot type, a jackpot display result for each small win type, and a small win display result. The first symbol variation designation command specifies to start varying display of the first special symbol. The second symbol variation designation command specifies to start variable display of the second special symbol. The symbol confirmation designation command specifies to end the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The winning start designation command designates the start of a jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot. The grand prize opening designation command specifies the display of the grand prize opening being opened or the V grand prize opening being opened in each round. The after-opening grand prize opening designation command specifies the display according to the opening of the grand prize opening or the closing after opening of the V grand prize opening in each round. The winning end designation command designates the end of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot. The first starting winning designation command specifies that there is a first starting winning. The second starting winning designation command specifies that there is a second starting winning. The normal state specification command specifies that the gaming state is a normal state, that is, a low base state. The special state designation command designates that the gaming state is a special state, that is, a high base state. The first pending storage number specification command specifies the first pending storage number. The second pending storage number specification command specifies the second pending storage number. The symbol designation command is used to determine the jackpot according to the judgment results of jackpot judgment, small hit judgment, and hit type judgment among the winning judgment results at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole 13 or the second starting winning hole 14. Specify the determination result of whether it will be a small hit or not, and the type of hit. The fluctuation type command specifies the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type determination among the winning determination results at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole 13 or the second starting winning hole 14.

The small win start designation command specifies the start of the small win game state. The small win end designation command specifies the end of the small win game state. The V-win designation command specifies that there has been a V-win. The V judgment winning ball detection designation command specifies that winning balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 have been detected, including both V winning balls and winning balls other than the V winning balls.

The RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 is provided with a first pending storage buffer and a second pending storage buffer. The first reservation storage buffer can store reservation information regarding the first special symbol. The second reservation storage buffer can store reservation information regarding the second special symbol. In the first pending storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the first pending storage number, such as 4, is secured. In the second pending storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second pending storage number, such as 4, is secured. The first holding memory buffer and the second holding memory buffer have a random number R as a hardware random number for determining a hit, a random number 1 as a random number for determining a winning type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern type as a software random number. It is possible to store a certain random number 2 and a random number 3, which is a random number for determining a variation pattern, in association with the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number. The data constituting the pending information stored in the first pending storage buffer is also referred to as first pending storage data. The data constituting the pending information stored in the second pending storage buffer is also referred to as second pending storage data. In this way, the first pending storage buffer stores pending information based on the first pending storage data, such as a random number for determining a hit obtained based on the starting prize entered into the first starting winning hole 13. In the second pending storage buffer, pending information based on the second pending storage data, such as a random number for determining a hit obtained based on the starting prize entered into the second starting winning hole 14, is stored.

Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13, the CPU 56 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the first holding storage buffer. Execute the process of storing and saving. Based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second holding storage buffer. Execute the process of storing and saving. The fact that information regarding such starting winnings is stored in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is also called pending storage.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed. In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal initialization processing, non-normal gaming state recovery processing, random number circuit setting processing (initializing the random number circuit 503), display random number updating processing (fluctuation pattern Various random number update processes such as type determination, variation pattern determination, etc.), initial value random number update process (regular update process of the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for symbol hit determination), etc. are executed.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes timer interrupt processing in steps S (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "S") 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process (S20) is executed to detect whether a power-off signal is output (whether the power-off signal is turned on or not). Next, in the switch process (S21), the gate switch 32a, the first starting winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, the V winning opening switch 87a, and the V judgment winning opening switch are activated via the input driver circuit 58 in the switch process (S21). 15a and the V judgment discharge switch 15b are input, and their states are judged.

Next, the CPU 56 executes a display control process (S22), and displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol retention storage display 18a, and the second special symbol display 8a. Display control of the special symbol retention memory display 18b and the normal symbol retention memory display 41 is performed. Regarding the first special symbol display 8a, second special symbol display 8b, and normal symbol display 10, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute. In addition, the random number update process for determination (S23) is executed to update the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as the random number for determining normal symbol hit and the random number for determining small hit type used for game control. do. The CPU 56 further executes an initial value random number update process (S24) and a display random number update process (S25), and updates the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number. Subsequently, the CPU 56 executes the special symbol process process (S26), and changes the display states of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b and the jackpot variable prize winning ball device 20 according to the special symbol process flag. The operation ports of the V judgment winning device 87 including the big winning hole and the V big winning hole are controlled in a predetermined order. In the special symbol process process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated according to the gaming state.

Next, a normal symbol process process (S27) is executed, and the display state of the normal symbol display 10 is controlled in a predetermined order according to the normal symbol process flag. In the normal symbol process process, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated according to the gaming state. Further, the CPU 56 executes the production control command control process (S28) and sends the production control command to the production control microcomputer 100. Further, the CPU 56 executes an information output process (S29), and outputs data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability fluctuation information, etc., which is supplied to the hall management computer, for example.

Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing (S30), and sets the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first starting winning port switch 13a, the second starting winning port switch 14a, and the accessory winning switch 25a. Subsequently, output processing (S31) is executed to output to the output port the contents regarding on/off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. Then, the CPU 56 executes the special symbol display control process (S32), and transfers the special symbol display control data for displaying the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag to the special symbol display control data setting. Set to output buffer. Furthermore, the CPU 56 executes the normal symbol display control process (S33), and transfers the normal symbol display control data for displaying the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag to the normal symbol display control data setting. Set to output buffer. The CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, it is set to an interrupt enabled state (S34), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. With the above control, the game control process is started at every predetermined time.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process processing (S26). In the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the big winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, a starting port switch passage process is executed (S311). Then, according to the internal state indicated by the value of the special symbol process flag, one of the processes of S300 to S310 is performed.

In the starting port switch passage process (S311), if the first starting port switch 13a is on, the first pending memory number is not reached an upper limit value such as 4, for example, and the first pending memory is The value of the first pending storage counter that counts the number of stored data is increased by 1, and numerical data is extracted from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating software random numbers. The numerical data extracted at this time may be any numerical data that includes, for example, a random number for determining a hit, a random number for determining a type of variation pattern, and a random number for determining a variation pattern. These numerical data are stored and saved in a storage area in the first reservation storage buffer. In the starting port switch passing process, if the second starting port switch 14a is turned on, storage of the second pending storage data is performed on the condition that the number of second pending memories does not reach an upper limit value such as 4, for example. The value of the second pending memory number counter for counting the number is increased by 1, and numerical data is extracted from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating software random numbers. The numerical data extracted at this time may be any numerical data that includes, for example, a random number for determining a hit, a random number for determining a type of variation pattern, and a random number for determining a variation pattern. These numerical data are stored and saved in a storage area in the second reservation storage buffer.

The special symbol normal processing (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a jackpot or small win, and determining the type of win if the display result is a jackpot or small win. The fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) is a process for determining a fluctuation pattern and controlling the start of time measurement by a fluctuation time timer. The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process that controls the transmission of a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100. The special symbol variation process (S303) is a process that advances the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process has elapsed. The special symbol stop process (S304) causes a variable display to be displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern has elapsed by the variable time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stopped symbol.

The big winning opening pre-opening process (S305) is a process that performs control to open the big winning opening in the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 when the jackpot game state is reached. The process during opening of the big winning opening (S306) performs controls such as sending a performance control command for round display during the jackpot gaming state to the performance control microcomputer 100, and processing to confirm that the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied. It is processing. If the conditions for closing the jackpot opening are met and there are no rounds left yet, the process moves to jackpot termination processing. The jackpot end process (S307) is a process that performs control etc. for causing the performance control microcomputer 100 to perform display control at the end of the jackpot game state.

The small win opening preprocessing (S308) is a process that performs control to open the operating port in the V judgment winning device 87 when the small winning game state is entered. The small winning opening process (S309) is a process of checking whether the game ball has won a V prize in the V winning area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87, and transmitting a V winning designation command when the game ball has won a V prize, and This is a process that performs processing such as a process of transmitting a small winning end designation command when the small winning end timing comes. The small hit end process (S310) is a process for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 in the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and includes sending a jackpot start designation command and winning a jackpot. Setting the display time, setting the jackpot opening mode, setting the process flag transition for the process before opening the big winning opening, etc., and on the other hand, when the relevant V winning is not made, without transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, special This is a process for executing a process for transitioning to the symbol normal process (S300).

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passing process in S312. In the starting port switch passage process, the CPU 56 first checks whether the first starting port switch 13a is in the on state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 13a is not in the on state, the process moves to S1221. If the first starting port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 checks whether the first pending memory number has reached the upper limit value in response to the detection of the first starting prize (S1212). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the first pending storage counter for counting the first pending storage number is 4 or not. If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process moves to S1221. If the first pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending memory counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reservation storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, random R which is a random number for determining a hit, random 1 which is a random number for determining a winning type, random 2 which is a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and random 3 which is a random number for determining a variation pattern are extracted, Stored in the storage area. In this case, the CPU 56 executes the winning presentation process (S1215). In the winning performance processing, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are determined in advance at the time of the starting winning, before the variation is executed, regarding the variation based on the detected first starting winning.

After a starting prize has occurred in the first starting winning hole 13 or the second starting winning hole 14 and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as pending information, when the start conditions for the variable display are met, the variable display At the timing to start, in the special symbol normal processing (S300), the variable display result is set as the jackpot display result for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) whose variable display starts based on the pending information. The determination of whether or not to use the variable display result as the small hit display result, and the determination of the hit type are performed using the jackpot judgment value, small hit judgment value, and , based on the hit type determination value. Then, in the variation pattern setting process (S301), a variation pattern including the variation pattern type is determined based on the variation pattern type determination value and the variation pattern determination value set corresponding to various random numbers.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the start of the variable display based on the starting prize in the first starting winning hole 13 or the second starting winning hole 14, specifically, when the game ball is in the first starting winning hole. At the timing when pending information is stored due to a starting winning in the winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, pending information that stores various data obtained at the starting winning is pre-read, and based on the pre-read pending information. In advance, the determination of whether or not it will be a jackpot, the determination of whether or not it will be a small hit, the type of jackpot, and the type of fluctuation pattern are determined in advance using jackpot judgment values set corresponding to various random numbers. , executes a winning presentation process that performs a look-ahead determination based on the small hit determination value, the hit type determination value, and the fluctuation pattern type determination value. As a result, the production control microcomputer 100 predicts the variable display result in advance before the variable display of the production symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of starting winning, during the variation display of the production symbols. It is possible to perform a look-ahead performance such as a look-ahead notice that gives notice of a jackpot or the possibility of a jackpot.

Based on the determination result of the winning performance process in S1215, the CPU 56 performs control (S1216) for transmitting a symbol designation command to the performance control microcomputer 100, and control (S1216) for transmitting a variation type command to the performance control microcomputer 100. S1217) is performed. In addition, the CPU 56 transmits the first starting prize designation command to the performance control microcomputer 100 (S1218), and also transmits the first pending memory number designation command corresponding to the value of the first pending memory number counter to the performance control microcomputer 100. Control of transmission to the computer 100 (S1219) is performed. By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, each time a starting prize is entered in the first starting prize opening 13, regardless of the gaming state, such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc. , both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control microcomputer 100. By executing the processes of S1216 to S1219, when a starting prize enters the first starting winning hole 13, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first starting winning designation command, and a first pending storage number designation command are executed. A set of four commands are sent at once within one timer interrupt.

In the starting port switch passage process, the CPU 56 checks whether the second starting port switch 14a is in the on state (S1221). If the second starting port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends immediately. If the second starting port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 checks whether the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit (S1222). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 4 or not. If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is immediately terminated. If the second pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending memory counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reservation storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, random R which is a random number for determining a hit, random 1 which is a random number for determining a winning type, random 2 which is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type, and random 3 which is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted, Stored in the storage area. After that, the CPU 56 executes the winning effect process similar to S1215 (S1225).

Based on the determination result of the winning performance process in S1225, the CPU 56 performs control (S1226) for transmitting a symbol designation command to the performance control microcomputer 100, and control (S1226) for transmitting a variation type command to the performance control microcomputer 100. S1227) is performed. In addition, the CPU 56 sends a second starting prize designation command to the performance control microcomputer 100 (S1228), and also transmits a second pending memory number designation command corresponding to the value of the second pending memory number counter to the performance control microcomputer 100. Control is performed to transmit data to the computer 100 (S1229). By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, each time a starting prize is entered in the second starting prize opening 14, regardless of the gaming state, such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc. , both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control microcomputer 100. By executing the processes of S1226 to S1229, when a starting prize enters the second starting winning hole 14, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a second starting winning designation command, and a second pending memory number designation command are executed. A set of four commands are sent at once within one timer interrupt. In addition, in the starting port switch passing process, even if the second pending memory number has reached the upper limit value in S1222, the second starting port switch 14a is in the ON state in S1221, so the second starting winning designation is Control may be performed to send commands to the production control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing (S300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks whether there is pending storage data constituting pending information in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). At this time, if there is no pending storage data in both pending storage buffers, a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command (S80) is performed, and then the process ends. On the other hand, when there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in S51, the CPU 56 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is no pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53). The special symbol pointer is a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer (S54). By the control of S52 to S54, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a based on the data in the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories=1 in the pending storage buffer corresponding to the setting of the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). For example, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory buffer is read out and the random number of the RAM 55 is read out. Store in buffer. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer is read out and stored in the RAM 55. Store it in the random number buffer. Then, the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area are shifted (S56). For example, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the count value of the first pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer are shifted. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second pending storage buffer are erased. As a result, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1.

Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction. (S59). For example, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, control is performed to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. On the other hand, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, control is performed to transmit a second pending storage number designation command. The subsequent processing in the special symbol process is performed depending on the data set in the special symbol pointer, so that the first special symbol is targeted and the second special symbol is targeted. can be shared.

Next, the CPU 56 reads a random number R, which is a random number for determining a hit, from the random number buffer, and executes a jackpot determining module (S61). At this time, the random number for hit determination extracted in S1214 of the starting port switch passing process or S1224 of the starting port switch passing process and stored in the pending storage buffer or the random number buffer is read out, and a jackpot determination is performed. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined win determination value and a random number for hit determination, and if they match, it is determined to be a jackpot or a small hit. That is, it is a program that executes a process for determining a jackpot or a process for determining a small hit. When the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, if it matches any of the jackpot determination values set by the first special symbol hit determination table, it is decided that the special symbol will be a jackpot. be done. When the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, if it matches any of the jackpot determination values set by the second special symbol hit determination table, it is decided that the special symbol will be a jackpot. be done.

If it is determined in S60 that the winning is a jackpot, a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot is set (S71). Subsequently, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5(C) is selected (S73). When the special symbol pointer is not "first", the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(D) is selected corresponding to the "second" case (S74). Thereafter, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the winning type corresponding to the value that matches the value of random 1, which is the random number for determining the winning type stored in the random number buffer area, is determined as the jackpot type. (S75).

If it does not match any jackpot determination value in S61, the jackpot determination target is set to the second special symbol by checking whether the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second". It is confirmed whether the display is a fluctuating display (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer is not data indicating "second" in S76, the process advances to S82 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer in S76, small hit determination processing is performed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol (S77). At this time, if the read random number R for hit determination matches any of the small hit determination values set by the second special symbol hit determination table, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. Ru.

If it is determined in S77 that it is a small win, a small win flag indicating that it is a small win is set (S78). Next, the small hit via jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5(E) is selected (S79). Thereafter, the winning type corresponding to the value that matches the value of random 1, which is the random number for determining the winning type stored in the random number buffer area, is determined as the type of the jackpot via small hit (S80). If it is determined in S77 not to make a small hit, the process moves to S82. Data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in a jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S81).

Next, a stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S82). For example, when neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. If the small hit flag is set, one of the small winning symbols corresponding to the winning type selected and determined in S80 is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, one of the jackpot symbols corresponding to the winning type selected and determined in S75 is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S83).

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in S32 to terminate the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Control is performed to derive and display a stop symbol (S131). For example, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is ended. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is ended. Also, a symbol confirmation designation command to be sent to the production control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). The symbol confirmation designation command set at this time is transmitted to the performance control microcomputer 100 by the performance control command control process of S28 shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (S133).

If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the time saving flag (S134). The time saving flag is a flag that is set when controlled to a special state including a time saving state. Note that the time saving flag may be set even when controlled to a special state that does not include the time saving state. Alternatively, when controlled to a special state that does not include a time saving state, a high base flag or the like different from the time saving flag may be set. In this way, instead of the time saving flag, a high base flag indicating whether high base control is to be performed may be used. Thereafter, settings are made to send a jackpot start designation command to the performance control microcomputer 100 (S135). The jackpot start designation command may include, for example, a jackpot start 1 designation command that corresponds to a jackpot due to the variable display of the first special symbol, and a jackpot start 2 designation command that corresponds to a jackpot due to the variable display of the second special symbol. Bye. Furthermore, the jackpot start 1 designation command may include multiple types of commands in which different values are set depending on which of the winning types is the first special drawing jackpot A to the first special drawing jackpot C. .

Following S135, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (S136). The jackpot display time may be any time that the effect display device 9 notifies that a jackpot has occurred. In the pre-processing for opening the big winning hole in S305 shown in FIG. 7, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1 for each timer interrupt, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole or the V big winning hole is opened and the round starts. . Then, the opening mode is set according to the jackpot type (S137). The jackpot type is specified by data indicating the winning type stored in the RAM 55. The opening mode of the big winning hole and the V big winning hole in a round in the jackpot game state can be determined by referring to the opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 that corresponds to the jackpot type. The number of times, the upper limit of the opening time, the upper limit of the winning ball count, the interval time between rounds, etc. can be partially or completely set differently for each type of jackpot. In this way, a plurality of opening modes in the round of the jackpot game state are prepared, which differ for each jackpot type with respect to the winning openings to be opened, the number of openings, and the like. Data indicating the opening mode of the jackpot is set in a predetermined storage area. For example, data on the number of openings is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S138), and the process is ended. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the big winning opening pre-opening process.

If the jackpot flag is not set in S133, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small win flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set, a small win release mode is set (S140). At this time, the small hit release control timer used for small win release control is set to the timer initial value. Regarding the small win opening mode, by referring to the small win opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the number of openings, the opening time, the interval time serving as the opening interval, etc. can be set. Data indicating the small winning opening mode is set in a specific storage area. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the process ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the small hit release preprocessing.

If the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is checked whether the time saving flag is set (S142). If the time saving flag is not set, the process advances to S152. When the time saving flag is set, the total time saving number counter is updated by subtracting -1 (S143). The total time saving number counter is a counting means for counting the total value of the number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the number of variable displays of the second special symbol in the special state including the time saving state. In the jackpot end process of FIG. 11, the total time saving number counter is set to an initial count value according to the winning type. Next, based on checking whether the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second", it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of the second special symbol (S145). If it is the end of the variable display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, the process advances to S148. When the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the special symbol 2 time saving number counter is updated by subtracting -1 (S146). The special figure 2 time-saving number counter is a counting means that counts the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner when the special state including the time-saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game. The special figure 2 time saving number counter is set to an initial count value according to the winning type in the jackpot ending process of FIG. 11. After that, it is confirmed whether the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). When the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter becomes "0", the process advances to S149 to end the special state. When the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S148, and it is confirmed whether the count value of the total time reduction number counter updated by subtraction in S143 has become "0". If the count value of the total time reduction counter is not "0", the process advances to S152. When the count value of the total time reduction counter is "0", the process advances to S149. In S149, the set time saving flag is reset. Then, the set time saving number counter is reset (S150). Also, settings are made to send a normal state designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (S151). In addition, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the special state is set, only the total time saving counter is used to display the special symbol. Processing related to the 2-hour shortening counter may not be executed.

If neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S152), and the process ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to special symbol normal processing.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer that was set before the jackpot end process was executed (S161). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the jackpot control timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end time has elapsed (S162). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends. On the other hand, if the elapsed time has elapsed, a counter corresponding to the winning type is set (S163). Here, the count initial value of the total time saving number counter is set according to the post-win control state for each winning type shown in FIG. For example, if the winning type is one of the first special drawing jackpot A, the second special drawing jackpot, or the small winning jackpot X, the data indicating "100" is set as the initial value of the total time saving counter Set. In addition, if the winning type is one of the first special drawing jackpot B, jackpot Y via small hit, or jackpot Z via small hit, the data indicating "15" is set as the initial count value of the total time saving counter. Set. When the winning type is the first special chart jackpot C, data indicating "3" is set as the initial count value of the total time saving number counter.

Next, settings are made to send a special state designation command corresponding to the winning type to the performance control microcomputer 100 (S164). For example, if the winning type is one of the first special pattern jackpot A, second special pattern jackpot, or jackpot In response to this, a first special state designation command is transmitted. In addition, if the hit type is one of the first special jackpot B, jackpot Y via small hit, or jackpot Z via small hit, a special state that can continue until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 15 times. In response to this, a second special state designation command is transmitted. When the winning type is the first special symbol jackpot C, a third special state designation command is transmitted corresponding to the special state that can continue until the variable display of the special symbol is executed three times. At this time, a time saving flag is set (S165). Then, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S166), and the process is ended. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to special symbol normal processing.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the small hit release preprocessing (S308) in the special symbol process processing. In the small win opening preprocessing, the CPU 56 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small win, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 56 transmits a small win start designation command indicating that a small win game state is started to the performance control microcomputer 100 (S412). Further, the CPU 56 sets a V judgment winning prize counter (S413). The V judgment prize winning number counter is a counting means for counting the number of winning prizes entered into the operation port of the V judgment prize winning device 87 in the small winning open state. For example, "10" is set as the count initial value of the V judgment prize winning number counter, and initial settings for down-counting the number of winning prizes to the V judgment prize winning device 87 are performed. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S309) (S413).

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening process (S309) in the special symbol process process. In the small win release process, the CPU 56 updates the small win release control timer by -1 (S430). Next, it is checked whether the count value of the V judgment winning prize counter is "0" (S431). The V judgment prize winning number counter is set to "10" as the initial count value in the small winning winning pre-processing shown in FIG. 12, and when 10 winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment prize winning counter is "0", the process advances to S441. When the count value of the V judgment prize winning counter is not "0", it is checked whether the small hit release control timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S432). When the small hit release control timer has timed out, the process advances to S441. When the small hit opening control timer has not timed out, the movable part 872 is operated to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 in accordance with the timed value of the small winning opening control timer based on the opening mode of the small winning. Processing for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

After that, the V winning switch 87a is turned on in order to determine whether or not a V winning that occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 that is in an open state inside the V judgment winning device 87 is detected. It is determined whether the state is the same (S434). If it is in the on state at this time, a V winning flag is set in response to the detection of a V winning prize (S435). Then, processing for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). Thereby, the performance control microcomputer 100 can recognize the detection of the V winning ball. Subsequently, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the inside of the V judgment winning device 87 wins a V prize, the V winning area 870 is closed, and after that, the game ball that enters the inside of the V judgment winning device 87 wins. , are all guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15b.

When it is not in the on state in S434, it is the time when the V winning prize is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V judgment winning switch 15b is in the on state (S438). At this time, if it is not in the on state, the process ends, and if it is in the on state, the count value of the V judgment winning prize counter is counted down by "-1" (S439). Further, processing for transmitting a V judgment winning ball detection designation command is performed (S440). Thereby, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize the detection of game balls that have entered the inside of the V judgment winning device 87, and can also recognize the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V judgment winning device 87. becomes possible.

When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is "0", the number of winnings to the V judgment prize winning device 87 has reached the upper limit value in the small winning game state, and the opening termination condition for the small winning is satisfied. It's time. Further, when the small win release control timer times out, it is when the small win release control is completed and the small win release end condition is satisfied. At these times, the CPU 56 operates the movable part 872 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 22, and closes the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 (SS441). When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small winning, the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter becomes "0". The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small win release control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed in accordance with the end of the small win release control in the small win release mode.

Next, data corresponding to a specific period that is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (SS442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small winning end process ( S310) is updated to the value corresponding to step S310) (SS443), and the process ends. As a result, time measurement for a specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed, is started. In addition, by setting the specific period that is the V winning prize validity period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning prize area 870 later than the time when the game ball normally passes, it is possible to detect the game ball. I can do it. Further, since a specific period is set, even if someone attempts to enter the V winning area illegally, only that period will be detected, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S310) in the special symbol process process. In the process after the end of the small win, the CPU 56 updates the V winning prize validity period timer by -1 (S441), and checks whether the V winning prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442). If the V winning prize validity period timer has not timed out, it is determined whether the V winning prize flag has already been set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a It is determined whether or not it is in the on state (S444). If it is not in the on state, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state, it means that a V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that a V winning is detected is set (S445). Then, processing for transmitting the V winning prize designation command is performed (S446), and the processing ends. Thereby, the performance control microcomputer 100 can recognize that a V winning prize has occurred.

When the V winning prize validity period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small winning end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the performance control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448).

If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that it is a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is set (S449). Further, data indicating the winning type of the jackpot via small winning is stored in the jackpot type buffer (S450). The data indicating the hit type of the jackpot via small hit may be stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in the special symbol normal processing of FIG. In S450, data indicating the winning type of the jackpot via small winning is officially stored in the jackpot type buffer in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot is officially won due to the occurrence of the V winning prize. At this time, the time saving flag is reset (S451). Subsequently, a jackpot start designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted (S452). The jackpot start designation command may include, for example, a jackpot start 3 designation command corresponding to the jackpot via small hit. The jackpot start 3 designation command may include a plurality of types of commands in which different values are set depending on whether the winning type is from jackpot X via small win to jackpot Z via small win. The production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the jackpot game state is started by the jackpot start designation command. In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (S453). In addition, an opening mode is set according to the jackpot type (S454). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big prize opening pre-opening process (S305) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small winning gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the jackpot game state will not occur, so the memory data of the jackpot type is erased (S456), and the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to correspond to the special symbol normal process (S300). The value is updated to the specified value (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win does not occur in the small winning gaming state, the state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the production control main processing executed by the production control CPU 101 of the production control microcomputer 100. When the power is turned on, the performance control CPU 101 starts executing the performance control main process. In the production control main process, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize a timer for determining the production control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) (S701). ). Thereafter, the performance control CPU 101 shifts to a loop process of monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the performance control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. In the production control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the production control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following production control process.

The effect control process includes a command analysis process (S704), an effect control process process (S705), a random number update process (S706), and a pending storage display control process (S707). In the command analysis process, the received production control command is analyzed and a flag is set according to the received production control command. For example, when a variable pattern command is received, the command data is stored in a variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 103. Further, when a display result designation command is received, the command data is stored in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 103. In addition, when various production control commands are received, a flag indicating that the command has been received is set.

In the performance control process processing, performance control is executed to perform various performances such as a performance corresponding to the variable display of special symbols on the performance display device 9, etc., according to the content of the performance control command analyzed in the command analysis process. In the production control process process, the production control process flag is updated according to the current control state, and the process corresponding to the production control process flag is selected from among the processes according to the control state. In the random number update process, count values of counters for generating various random numbers, such as random numbers for selecting and determining various performance contents, are updated. In the hold storage display control process, control is performed to update the hold display image displayed on the effect display device 9 when a predetermined display update condition is satisfied.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the production control process processing (S705) in the production control main processing. In the performance control process process, the performance control CPU 101 executes the ball-hitting promotion process (S500) and the pre-reading process (S501), and then executes any one of S800 to S810 depending on the value of the performance control process flag. conduct. In the production control process processing, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled, and production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed. Both the control regarding the performance synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the control regarding the performance synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed in one common performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing, control regarding the performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols is also executed in a manner that can be displayed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols.

In the ball hitting promotion effect processing (S500), the game state is confirmed based on various effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560. A ball hitting promotion effect is executed according to the game state confirmed at this time. The ball-hitting promotion performance is a performance that provides notification to encourage hitting of the game ball into at least one of the first route (left-handed hitting route) and the second route (right-handed hitting route) in the game area 7. For example, the ball hitting promotion performance includes a right-handed hitting promotion notification performance that provides notification to encourage hitting the game ball into the second path (right-handed hitting path). The batting promotion performance may include the right-handed batting promotion notification performance and a left-handed batting promotion notification performance that promotes hitting the game ball into the first path (left-handed hitting path). For example, the performance of right-handed driving promotion notification may include continuously displaying a text image that suggests and promotes right-handed batting, such as "right-handed batting," along with a right-pointing arrow image in a specific display area of the performance display device. It is done by doing. As a batting promotion performance, based on the state in which the right-handed batting promotion notification is being executed, the hitting of the game ball (right-handed batting) to the second path (right-handed batting route) is promoted, and after the right-handed batting promotion notification is finished. In a predetermined period, hitting the game ball into the first path (left hitting path) (left hitting) may be promoted by executing left hitting promotion notification. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the left-handed hitting promotion notification may be ended.

In the pre-reading process (S501), the pending display information corresponding to the pending information possessed by the game control microcomputer 560 is stored, and the pending display information can be used for the pre-reading effect. In the pre-reading performance, before the turn of the variable display of special symbols based on certain pending information arrives, the pending display information is read in advance and the content of the variable display of the special symbol based on the corresponding pending information is determined, To make it possible to suggest how the changing display of special symbols will be in the future by giving advance notice or the like at an earlier stage. The pending information targeted by the look-ahead presentation is also referred to as target pending information. In addition, the variable display of special symbols based on the pending information that is the target of the look-ahead presentation is also referred to as target variation.

In the variable pattern command reception waiting process (S800), it is confirmed whether or not a variable pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. For example, it is checked whether the variable pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. In the performance symbol variation start process (S801), control is performed so that a variation performance, which is a performance corresponding to the variable display of special symbols, is started. In response to the received variation pattern command, a production pattern of the variation time production is selected, and a performance time timer for timing the performance time to be executed is started. In the performance symbol variation process (S802), the switching timing of each state constituting the performance pattern is controlled, and it is monitored whether or not the performance time counted by the performance time timer has ended. In the production symbol fluctuation stop processing (S803), based on whether the production time has ended or the symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the production at the time of variation is ended, and the fixed special symbol that is the result of the variation display of the special symbol is Performs control to display the corresponding performance results.

In the jackpot display process (S804), display control such as control to perform a fanfare effect is performed when a jackpot occurs. The fanfare performance when a jackpot occurs includes a jackpot display for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the performance display device 9. In the in-round process (S805), display control is performed during the jackpot round. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S807). In the round post-processing (S806), display control between jackpot rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (S805). In the jackpot end performance processing (S807), display control is performed on the performance display device 9 to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

In the small win display process (S808), when a small win occurs, display control such as control to perform a fanfare effect for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) is performed. The fanfare effect when a small win occurs includes a small win display for notifying the occurrence of a small win on the effect display device 9. In the small win opening process (S809), various performance controls are performed during opening of the V judgment winning device 87 in the small win. In the small win end effect process (S810), the effect display device 9 performs effect control to notify the player that the small win game state has ended. In addition, in the small winning game state, when the V winning switch 87a detects the V winning of the game ball and it is determined that the V winning has occurred, the V winning performance control is performed to notify that the V winning has occurred. When a V win occurs in the small win game state, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) in order to shift to the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when a V prize does not occur in the small win game state, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable pattern command reception waiting process (S800) because the transition to the jackpot game state is not made.

In the production control process processing, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled by the above-mentioned processes, a variation performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is started, and a production result corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol is displayed. Is displayed. For example, based on the received variation pattern command and display result designation command, the production control CPU 101 recognizes the specified variation pattern and display result for the variation display to be executed, and performs the production of the variation time production. determine the outcome. Further, in the performance control process processing, the execution status of the performance control process is confirmed by the ball hitting promotion performance process in S500, and the ball hitting promotion performance is executed according to the game control state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ball hitting promotion performances including high base state right hitting promotion notification, small hit right hitting promotion notification, and jackpot right hitting promotion notification. The high base state right-hitting promotion notification is a ball-hitting promotion effect for making the game ball aim to enter the gate 32 and the second starting prize opening 14 of the variable winning ball device 15 by hitting right in the high base state. The small hit right hitting promotion notification is a ball hitting promotion effect to make the player hit right and aim the game ball to enter the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning game state. The jackpot right-hitting promotion notification is a ball-hitting promotion for making the game ball aim to enter the big winning opening of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 or the V big winning opening of the V judgment winning ball device 87 by hitting right in the jackpot game state. It's a performance.

High base state right-handed hitting promotion notification, small hit right-handed hitting promotion notification, and jackpot right-handed hitting promotion notification include a text image that suggests and promotes right-handed hitting, such as "right-handed hitting," along with a right-pointing arrow image. It may also be executed using the same image that is displayed continuously. In other words, even if the right-hand hit promotion notification is displayed in a state where it is impossible to specify which type of promotion notification it corresponds to: a promotion notification in a high base state, a promotion notification in a small hit, or a promotion notification in a jackpot. good. The right-handed batting promotion notification is an image that continuously displays a character image that suggests and promotes right-handed batting, such as "right-handed batting," along with a right-pointing arrow image. It is executed using different images depending on the game control state, such as displaying a yellow image for a small hit right-hitting promotion notification, and displaying a red image for a jackpot right-hitting promotion notification. Good too. The size of the image used for the performance may be varied depending on the type of ball-hitting promotion performance. For example, the size of images used for presentation may be varied depending on the degree of advantage for the player. As an example, a small-sized image is used to promote a small hit to the right, a medium-sized image is used to promote a high base state right-handed player, and a large-sized image is used to promote a jackpot to the right. Promotional notification may be made using an image of . In addition, regarding the high base state hitting right promotion notification, similar to the jackpot right hitting promotion notification, the promotion notification may be made using a large image.

As the pachinko game machine 1, an enclosed type game machine may be adopted in which game media are enclosed and game points (scores) are added without paying out the game media to the player's hand in response to the occurrence of a winning. Enclosed type gaming machines have a circulation path that circulates a plurality of game balls, which are an example of gaming media, within the gaming machine, and are also equipped with a storage unit that stores game points, and are equipped with a storage unit that stores game points. Accordingly, game points are added to the storage section, game points are subtracted from the storage section according to the firing operation of the game ball, and game points are added to the storage section according to the occurrence of winning. Although we have described a gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in response to the occurrence of a winning, the game media is enclosed and the game points (game points ( An enclosed gaming machine that adds up points (scores) may also be used. Enclosed type gaming machines have a circulation path that circulates a plurality of game balls, which are an example of gaming media, within the gaming machine, and are also equipped with a storage unit that stores game points, and are equipped with a storage unit that stores game points. Accordingly, game points are added to the storage section, game points are subtracted from the storage section according to the firing operation of the game ball, and game points are added to the storage section according to the occurrence of winning.

Expressions comparing various proportions such as the performance execution rate (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include that one of the proportions is "0%". For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%". For example, among the values within the range of 0% to 100%, it may be a value that includes 0%, a value that includes 100%, or a value that does not include 0% and 100%.

As the means for detecting the player's actions, detection means capable of directly detecting the player's actions, such as an infrared sensor or a motion sensor, may be used.

FIG. 17-1 shows a configuration example AKP0 of the screen display in the effect display device 9. In the configuration example AKP0, on the screen of the performance display device 9, performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, a small symbol display area 9K, and a right-handed display area 9Z are provided. The effect pattern display area 9L is a "left" pattern display area provided to variably display the effect pattern which is the left pattern. The effect pattern display area 9C is a "medium" pattern display area provided for variably displaying a medium pattern effect pattern. The performance symbol display area 9R is a "right" symbol display area provided to variably display the performance symbol that is the right symbol.

A small symbol display area 9K is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the effect display device 9. The small symbol display area 9K is smaller than the performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the upper right side on the screen of the performance display device 9, for example. In the small symbol display area 9K, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and performance symbols. The performance image showing the small design is smaller than the identification information image which is the performance image showing the performance design, and can be displayed variably in a manner that is partially or completely common to each of the identification information images showing the performance design. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if an identification information image showing a production pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the production image showing a small pattern has the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the production pattern. Since the image shows the corresponding numbers and does not include a part showing the character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the identification information image showing the performance pattern. In the small symbol display area 9K provided on the screen of the performance display device 9, variable display of small symbols serving as reduced identification information is performed, and a determined small symbol serving as a display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

In response to the variable display of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol, variable display of production symbols and small symbols is executed. After that, when a fixed special symbol is derived as a result of variable display of special symbols, a final stop symbol is derived as a result of variable display of performance symbols, and a final stop symbol is derived as a result of variable display of small symbols. A fixed small pattern is derived. In this way, deriving various display symbols such as special symbols, performance symbols, and small symbols means to terminate the variable display by stopping and displaying the display symbols as identification information by a complete stop or a final stop. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the performance symbol until the final performance symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived, the fluctuation speed of the performance symbol becomes "0" and the performance symbol changes. The display may remain stationary, resulting in, for example, a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion/contraction. This state of display of the production symbols is also called a stopped display due to temporary suspension of the production symbols, and although the display result in the variable display of the production symbols is not definitively displayed, the fluctuation of the production symbols due to scroll display or update display is not guaranteed. The player can recognize that no progress has been made. In addition, for the stop display by temporarily stopping the production design, it is possible to stop display by completely stopping the production design for a period shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion/contraction. May be included. The small symbols may also be displayed as long as they can be temporarily stopped and displayed in the same way as the performance symbols.

FIG. 17-2 shows an example of the configuration of the performance control command used as the starting opening winning command. In the starting opening switch passing process (S311) in the special symbol process process, the starting opening winning commands include a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first starting winning designation command or a second starting winning designation command, and a first pending storage number designation. Settings are made for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to the occurrence of a starting prize, such as a command or a second pending storage number command. FIG. 17-2(A) shows a setting example regarding these starting opening winning commands. FIG. 17-2(B) shows a setting example of the symbol designation command included in the starting opening winning command.

Command A401H, which is the first starting winning designation command, and command A402H, which is the second starting winning designation command, are included in the starting winning designation command that designates the occurrence of a starting winning. Note that the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. The command C0XXH, which is the first pending storage number specification command, and the command C1XXH, which is the second pending storage number specification command, are included in the pending storage number specification command that specifies the pending storage number. Note that XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. In the pending storage number designation command, different EXT data (for example, any one of 00H to 04H) is set depending on the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. The symbol designation command is a command C2XXH in which different EXT data (for example, any one of 00H to 06H) is set depending on the display result and the result of pre-read determination regarding the hit type. The variation type command is a command C3XXH in which different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern type, the result of pre-read determination regarding the variation pattern, etc.

Among the symbol designation commands, commands C201H and C202H can be sent when the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination, matches the jackpot determination value, and it is determined that a jackpot will occur due to the fluctuating display of the special symbol. Accordingly, the winning determination result is notified that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Among the symbol designation commands, commands C203H to C205H can be sent when the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination, matches the small hit determination value, and it is determined that a small hit will occur due to the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The winning determination result is notified that the winning game state is controlled by the small winning game state. In addition, commands C203H to C205H specifiably notify which of the winning type is from jackpot X via small hit to jackpot Z via small hit, depending on the value of random 1 which is a random number for determining the winning type. Among the symbol designation commands, command C206H can be sent when the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination, does not match either the jackpot determination value or the small hit determination value, and the fluctuating display of the special symbol will prevent the jackpot from occurring. Since it is determined that a small win does not occur, a winning determination result is notified that the jackpot game state or the small win game state is not controlled. In this way, the symbol designation command uses random R, which is a random number for determining a hit, and random 1, which is a random number for determining a hit type, to be read at the time of starting winning, so that the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small." It is transmitted as determination result information that notifies the winning determination result, such as whether or not it is determined to be a "win" and the winning type when the variable display result of the special symbol is determined to be a "small win." When the variable display result of the special symbol is not determined as a "big hit" or "small hit", the variable display result of the special symbol is also said to be a "loss". When the variable display result of the special symbol is determined to be a "big hit" or "small win", the variable display result of the special symbol is also referred to as a "win".

FIG. 17-3 shows an example of the structure of the fluctuation pattern. The plurality of variation patterns shown in FIG. 17-3 differ in special symbol variation time and variable display mode of performance symbols. The special symbol variation time is the time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol until the finalized special symbol is derived as a variable display result in the variable display of the special symbol. The plurality of variation patterns include variation patterns in which the variable display result of the special symbol corresponds to either a "loss" or a "win". The variation pattern corresponding to the "win" may be one that corresponds to both the special symbol jackpot and the jackpot via small hit. In addition, the fluctuation patterns that correspond to "hits" include a fluctuation pattern that corresponds only to a special symbol jackpot and does not correspond to a jackpot via a small hit, a fluctuation pattern that corresponds only to a jackpot via a small hit and does not correspond to a special symbol jackpot, and a special symbol. It may include some or all of the variation patterns that correspond to both the jackpot and the jackpot via small win.

FIG. 17-4 shows an example of determining a variation pattern depending on the gaming state and the like. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are two cases: in the normal state, when the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is 3 or more, when the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is 1 or 2, and when the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is The setting of the determinable pattern is different between the case of the final variation where the remaining number of times of display is 0 and the case of the variation display corresponding to the second pending storage at the end of the special state. The remaining number of variable displays in the special state is the remaining number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the special state. The fluctuation pattern is determined when the fluctuation display of the special symbol starts, and the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state can be specified as the remaining number of fluctuation displays after the current fluctuation display starts. Bye. For example, in the case of a determinable pattern corresponding to the final variation, which is the last variation display in a special state, the number of remaining variation displays becomes 0 after the current variation display starts, so the variation in the special state A determinable pattern is set when the remaining number of times of display is 0. Regarding the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state, when each variable display is executed, the special state has ended and the gaming state is in the normal state. However, for the second reserved storage portion at the end of the special state, a special fluctuation pattern can be determined, unlike the fluctuation display in other normal states. Therefore, the setting of the determinable pattern is different between the case where the variable display corresponds to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state and the case where the variable display corresponds to the other normal state. In the determination example shown in Figure 17-4, if the variable display result is "win", the hit type is one of the 1st special pattern jackpot A to 1st special pattern jackpot C or the 2nd special pattern jackpot. Includes cases where the display result of the special symbol is "Jackpot" and cases where the display result of the special symbol whose hit type is any of the following: Jackpot X via small hit to Jackpot Z via small win. There is.

As shown in FIG. 17-4 (A), in the determination example AKE01 in the normal state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "lost", the variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 -PA2-3 and PB2-1 to PB2-4 are included in the determinable patterns. If the display result of the variable display is "lost" in a normal state where high base control or electric chew support control is not performed, it is also called a "normal loss". Variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 are non-reach patterns in which the variable display mode of the production symbol does not become a reach mode, and the fixed production symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the production symbol. included in the fluctuation pattern. The display result in the case of a confirmed performance symbol of a non-reach combination is also referred to as a non-reach loss. Variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, PB2-1 to PB2-4 are a predetermined reach that is not a winning combination as a display result of the variable display of the production symbol after the variable display mode of the production symbol becomes the reach mode. It is included in the reach variation pattern in which the fixed effect design of the combination is stopped and displayed. The display result when the reach combination becomes a confirmed production pattern is also called a reach loss. A reach combination is also called a reach loss combination. The reach mode is a mode in which when the production symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the variable display form part of a jackpot combination, the production symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed continue to be variablely displayed. . For example, in the ready-to-win mode, the same performance symbols are stopped and displayed as the left symbol and the right symbol. The fact that the variable display of the performance symbol is in the ready-to-reach mode is also said to be established. The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are also collectively referred to as the loss variation pattern. The non-reach combination and the reach combination are also referred to as a losing combination.

In the variable display of performance graphics using the variation pattern PA1-4, by temporarily stopping the performance design during variable display and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be simulated as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance that appears is executed. The variable display that resumes after temporarily stopping the production pattern is also called pseudo continuous variation. In the variable display of performance graphics using the variation pattern PA1-4, after the pseudo continuous variation in the pseudo continuous performance is executed once, the fixed performance symbols of the non-reach combination are stopped and displayed. Even in the variable display of the performance symbols using the variation pattern PA2-2 and the variation pattern PB2-2, the pseudo continuous variation is executed once. In the variable display of the production symbols using the variation pattern PA2-3 and the variation pattern PB2-3, the pseudo continuous variation is executed twice. In the variable display of the performance symbols using the variation pattern PB2-4, the pseudo continuous variation is executed three times. In the variable display of the effect pattern using any of the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB2-2 to PB2-4, after the pseudo continuous variation in the pseudo continuous effect is executed once or multiple times, the effect of the effect pattern is The variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and finally the determined effect pattern of the reach-loss combination is stopped and displayed.

In the determination example AKE01, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variable patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 and PB3-1 to PB3-4 are included in the determinable patterns. Variable patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3, PB3-1 to PB3-4 are determined production symbols of winning combinations as a display result of variable display of production symbols after the variable display mode of production symbols becomes the reach mode. is included in the hit fluctuation pattern that is stopped and displayed. The winning variation pattern can be used as a jackpot variation pattern when the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot" or as a small win variation pattern when the display result of the special symbol is a "small win." The confirmed effect pattern of the winning combination is a display result mode in which the same effect patterns are all stopped and displayed as a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern. In the performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, performance symbols representing numbers 1 to 9, for example, are variably displayed as left symbols, middle symbols, and right symbols, respectively. Further, the performance pattern showing the number 7 includes a performance pattern whose display color is red and which shows the number 7, and a performance pattern whose display color is gold and shows the number 7. A production pattern whose display color is red and shows the number 7 is also referred to as a red 7 production pattern. A performance pattern whose display color is gold and shows the number 7 is also referred to as a gold 7 performance pattern.

For example, different performance symbols may be determined depending on the winning type as the determined performance symbols of the winning combination. As an example, if the winning type is one of the first special pattern jackpot A, the second special pattern jackpot, or the small hit via jackpot . Further, when the winning type is one of the first special figure jackpot B, jackpot Y via small hit, or jackpot Z via small hit, the red 7 performance pattern can be determined as the confirmed performance pattern of the winning combination. When the winning type is the first special jackpot C, any of the performance symbols showing numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 can be determined as the final performance symbol of the winning combination. In addition, even if a confirmed performance symbol of a winning combination using any of the production symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, or 9 is derived as a display result in the variable display of production symbols, the promotion will be subsequently promoted. By executing the performance, other winning types may be notified.

If the hit type is 1st special pattern jackpot A, 2nd special pattern jackpot, or jackpot It becomes possible to control the state. If the hit type is the first special symbol jackpot B, jackpot Y via small hit, or jackpot Z via small hit, the special symbol will be displayed as a post-win control state until the number of times the special symbol is displayed 15 times. It becomes possible to control the state. When the winning type is the first special symbol jackpot C, the special state can be controlled as a post-win control state until the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches three times. In this way, as a display result in the variable display of performance symbols, the red 7 When a fixed performance pattern of a winning combination using performance patterns is derived, a jackpot advantageous to the player can occur in terms of post-win control status and the like. As a display result in the variable display of performance symbols, a confirmed performance symbol of a winning combination using any of the production symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, or 9 is derived, or a case where the production symbol of red 7 is used. A jackpot that is more advantageous for the player in terms of the post-win control state, etc. when a fixed effect pattern for a winning combination using a gold 7 effect pattern is derived than when a confirmed effect pattern for a winning combination is derived. can occur.

A ready-to-win presentation is executed in response to a ready-to-win mode being entered during variable display of presentation symbols. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of types of ready-to-win performances are executed in which the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "win" is different depending on the performance mode. The rate at which the variable display result is a "hit" is also referred to as the probability of success or the expectation of success. The reach performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher probability of winning than the normal reach. The variation pattern in the determination example AKE01 is that when the variable display result is a "lose", the variation pattern that becomes the usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the number of retained memories and the expectation of winning, and when the variable display result is a "win". In some cases, a variation pattern that becomes a usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the expected degree of winning. For example, when the number of pending memories is large, a non-reach variation pattern with a shorter special symbol variation time may be determined as the pattern to be used at a higher rate than when the number of pending memories is small. When the variable display result is a "win", a variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a "loss" may be determined as the pattern to be used. When the variable display result is a "win", a variation pattern may be determined in which the super reach effect is executed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a "loss".

As shown in FIG. 17-4(B), in the determination example AKE02 when the remaining number of variable displays in the special state is 3 or more, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "loss", the variable pattern PB1- 1 to PB1-3, PA2-1 to PA2-3, and PB2-1 to PB2-4 are included in the determinable patterns. The fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-3 are included in the non-reach fluctuation patterns. When the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is 3 or more, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern with a shorter special symbol fluctuation time as the usage pattern at a higher rate than in the normal state. It is only necessary to perform time-saving control that shortens the time. In the case of a special state, for example, there is a first special period such as a period in which the remaining number of fluctuation displays is 3 or more, and a second special period such as a period in which the remaining number of fluctuation displays is less than 3. The presence or absence of time saving control that shortens the variable display time may be varied. In this case, the presence or absence of the time saving control is set so that the time saving control is performed in the first special period when the special state is in, and the time saving control is not performed in the second special period when the special state is in the state. In a special state where time saving control is being performed together with high base control and electric chew support control, if the variable display result is a "loss", it is also called "loss during time saving". In decision example AKE02, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", variable patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 and PB3-1 to PB3-4 are included in the determinable patterns, as in decision example AKE01. It is. The variation pattern in determination example AKE02 is that when the variable display result is a "lose", the variation pattern that becomes the usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the number of retained memories and the expectation of winning, and when the variable display result is a "win". In some cases, a variation pattern that becomes a usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the expected degree of winning.

As shown in FIG. 17-4 (C), in the determination example AKE03 when the remaining number of variable displays in the special state is 1 or 2, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "loss", the variable pattern PC1 -1 and PC1-2 are included in the determinable pattern. In the variable display of the effect symbols using the variable pattern PC1-1 and the variable pattern PC1-2, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed. In the variable display of the effect symbols using the variable pattern PC1-1 and the variable pattern PC1-2, the ready-to-win mode may or may not be the ready-to-reach mode. In the determination example AKE03, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variable patterns PC3-1 and PC3-2 are included in the determinable patterns. In the variable display of the effect symbols by the variable patterns PC3-1 and PC3-2, after the variable display or reach effect which has a part in common with the variable display of the effect symbols by the variable patterns PC1-1 and PC1-2 is executed, the winning The fixed effect design of the combination may be displayed in a stopped state. The variation pattern in determination example AKE03 may be determined to be a usage pattern at a rate according to the expectation of winning. For example, when the variable display result is a "loss", the variable pattern PC1-1 may be determined to be the pattern to be used at a higher rate than the variable pattern PC1-2. If the variable display result is a "win", the variable pattern PC3-2 may be determined as the pattern to be used at a higher rate than the variable pattern PC3-1.

As shown in Figure 17-4 (D), in the decision example AKE04 where the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is 0 and the final fluctuation is 0, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "loss", the fluctuation Only the pattern PC1-3 becomes a determinable pattern, and if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", only the variable pattern PC3-3 becomes a determinable pattern. As shown in FIG. 17-3, both the variation pattern PC1-3 and the variation pattern PC3-3 are variation patterns in which the special figure variation time is 140000ms (milliseconds). Therefore, the final variation, which is the final variation display in the special state, has the same special symbol variation time whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "win".

As shown in FIG. 17-4 (E), in the determination example AKE05 where the variable display corresponds to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "lost", Only the variable pattern PD1-1 becomes a determinable pattern, and if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variable patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 are included in the determinable patterns. As shown in FIG. 17-3, the variation pattern PD1-1 is a variation pattern with an extremely short variation display time, such as a special figure variation time of 500 ms. Therefore, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a "loss", the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory at the end of the special state will start and end repeatedly within a short period of time, Memories are digested. In addition, when the variable display result of the special symbol is "win", the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory at the end of the special state has a shorter special symbol variation time than the variable display in other gaming states. Since it is easy to do so, it is easy to derive a fixed performance pattern with a winning combination in a short period of time.

The special state final variation is the final variation that is the final variation display in the special state. During the execution of the variable display that is the final change in the special state, after the acquisition performance, the expectation level increasing performance, and the preview performance one or more times are executed, the loss response performance or the win response performance is executed. The acquisition performance is a preliminary performance that displays a display number of specific images related to the stored number of pending information that becomes the second pending storage. The specific image may be, for example, a panel-shaped effect image showing a character selected from a plurality of types of characters. The expectation level increasing performance is a change performance in which the display mode of a specific image can be changed in accordance with the occurrence of a second starting prize due to the game ball passing through the second starting prize opening 14. However, when the expectation level increasing effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode of the specific image changes and cases where the display mode of the specific image does not change. The one or more preview performance is a specific performance related to the specific image displayed in the acquisition performance. The loss response performance is a loss notification performance that notifies that the display result of the special symbol becomes a loss symbol and that no jackpot or small hit occurs. The hit corresponding performance is a winning notification performance in which the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol, and the occurrence of a jackpot or a small win is notified. The loss response performance and the win response performance are also referred to as display result response performance. Performances corresponding to display results, including acquisition performance, expectation level increasing performance, preview performance, loss response performance, and win response performance, are all included in the final variation performance that can be executed in response to the final variation of the special state.

The final variation effect may include displaying a background image by playing a moving image or displaying an animation of a still image. The display of the background image included in such a final variation effect may be controlled to be able to continue even after the special state final variation ends until the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory is finished. For example, the loss-responsive performance and the winning-response performance include the playback display of a moving image or the animation display of a still image in the display of a background image, and even after the final variation of the special state ends, the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory is displayed. It will continue to run until it finishes. This gives the player the impression that the variation display that is the final variation of the special state and the variation display that corresponds to the second pending memory is a consistent series of variation displays, and the player can play the game with respect to each variation display. Appropriate display effects that increase the interest of people can be made possible.

In the acquisition performance, for example, the maximum display is performed in connection with one fluctuating display that is the final fluctuation in the special state and four fluctuating displays that correspond to the upper limit of the number of stored information that is the second suspended memory. It is sufficient if it is possible to display a specific image with a number of 5. When the execution of the acquisition effect is started, if the number of stored information as the second pending memory has reached the upper limit of 4, multiple types of images will be displayed as 5 specific images corresponding to the maximum display number. It is sufficient if it is possible to display a panel-like effect image showing a character selected from among the characters. A panel-shaped performance image showing characters that can be displayed in an acquisition performance is also referred to as a character panel image. The number of character panel images to be displayed in the acquisition effect may be determined as long as it can be determined based on the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of stored pieces of pending information to be the second held memory. The value obtained by adding 1 to the number of stored hold information that becomes the second hold memory is the value obtained by adding 1, which is the number of execution times of the change display that becomes the final change in the special state, to the number of times the change display is executed by the second hold memory. It is.

In the preview performance, it is only necessary that a battle performance using the character shown in the character panel image can be executed as a performance related to the specific image displayed in the acquisition performance. In battle production, for example, it is possible to play back a moving image or display an animation of a still image so that the character shown in the character panel image becomes an ally character and fights against an enemy character different from the ally character. Good to have. In one or more preview presentations, for example, in each preview presentation, a scene where an ally character loses a battle with an enemy character is displayed, and the display result of the special symbol becomes a losing symbol, resulting in a jackpot or small win. It is possible to suggest that a hit will not occur. On the other hand, in each preview performance, for example, by displaying a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character, the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol, and a jackpot or small prize is realized. It is possible to suggest that this will occur. In this way, each preview performance may suggest that a jackpot or small win will occur, or may suggest that a jackpot or small win will not occur, depending on the presentation format such as the display format of the performance image. There is. A suggestion that a jackpot or small win will not occur due to the presentation style of the preview presentation is also called a loss suggestion. A preview performance that indicates a loss is also called a loss notice. A suggestion that a jackpot or a small win will occur due to the presentation style of the preview presentation is also called a hit suggestion. A preview performance in a performance mode that suggests a win is also referred to as a win notice.

The number of times a specific image is displayed in the acquisition performance that is the advance performance and the number of executions until a hit is suggested in the preview performance are not necessarily the number of stored information that is the second retention memory or the display result of the special symbol is the jackpot symbol. Alternatively, it may not be the same as the number of executions until the variable display that results in a small winning symbol. For example, when the execution of the acquisition effect is started, even if the number of stored pieces of pending information that becomes the second pending memory has not reached the upper limit of 4, as 5 specific images corresponding to the maximum number of displayed images, Up to five character panel images, which are panel-shaped performance images, may be displayed. For example, even if a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character is displayed in the second preview performance, suggesting the occurrence of a jackpot or small win, the pending information becomes the second pending memory. Among them, the display result of the special symbol based on the second and subsequent pending information may become a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol.

On the other hand, the number of displayed specific images and the display mode in the acquired performance that is the preliminary performance are related to the number of times the preview performance is executed and the performance mode. For example, the number of character panel images displayed as specific images in the acquisition performance is determined to be equal to or greater than the number of times the preview performance is executed, and never less than the number of times the preview performance is executed. When five character panel images corresponding to the maximum number of specific images are displayed, the first character panel image can suggest an ally character in the first preview performance, and the second character The panel image can suggest the ally character in the second preview performance, the third character panel image can suggest the ally character in the third preview performance, and the fourth character panel image can suggest the ally character in the fourth preview performance. It is possible to suggest an ally character in the preview performance, and the fifth character panel image can suggest a ally character in the fifth preview performance.

FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 show execution periods and execution timings of various effects corresponding to final changes in the special state. Among these, in Fig. 17-5, the display result of the special symbol is a losing symbol in both the final variation in the special state and the variation display based on the pending information corresponding to 4, which is the upper limit of the second pending memory number. In relation to the case of "losing", the execution period and execution timing of various performances including five preview performances are shown. Figure 17-6 shows that in the final variation in the special state and the variation display based on the pending information corresponding to the second pending memory number 1 and 2, the display result of the special symbol is a "losing" symbol. Yes, in the variable display based on the reservation information corresponding to the second reservation memory number of 3, in relation to the case of "hit" where the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol, two preview performances are performed. It shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects including. In the reservation information stored as the second reservation memory, the reservation information corresponding to the variable display of "hit" in which the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol is also referred to as specific reservation information.

For example, based on the winning type being determined as the first special symbol jackpot C, the display result of the first special symbol becomes "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and after this jackpot gaming state ends, the special When controlled by the state, three variable displays can be performed in the special state. Then, the variable display corresponding to the remaining number of times of 2 and 1 is executed, and when the display result becomes "lost" in each variable display, the variable display that becomes the final variation of the special state is started at timing AKT01. In the variable display of performance symbols and small symbols, with the start of the special state final variation, all symbol variations in which all of the left, middle, and right symbols vary are started. Note that in response to the start of the final variation of the special state, the performance symbols may be set to a non-display state so that the performance symbols are not displayed. Thereafter, at timing AKT02, execution of the acquisition effect is started, and the number of characters displayed in the panel-like effect image serving as the specific image may be increased in accordance with the elapsed time. When the timing AKT03 is reached, the execution of the acquisition effect is completed, the execution of the expectation level increasing effect is started, and the display mode of the panel-shaped effect image serving as the specific image can be changed. In the expectation level increasing performance, when a game ball entering the second starting prize opening 14 is detected, it is sufficient that the display mode of the specific image may change or may not change. When the display mode of a specific image changes due to the effect of increasing the expectation level, the expectation level of winning increases. Then, at timing AKT04, the execution of the expectation level increasing effect ends.

Next, at timing AKT11, execution of the preview effect is started. In the case shown in FIG. 17-5, each preview performance is executed corresponding to each of the timings AKT11 to AKT15, so that a total of five preview performances are performed. When five preview performances are performed, the first preview performance can indicate whether the final change in the special state is a success or a loss, and the second preview performance corresponds to the second pending memory number of 1. The fluctuating display can suggest whether it is a win or a loss, and the fluctuating display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 2 can suggest whether it is a win or a loss by the third preview performance, and the second preview performance can indicate whether the fluctuating display is a win or a loss. The variable display corresponding to the number of pending memories of 3 can suggest whether it is a win or a loss, and the variable display corresponding to the second number of pending memories of 4 can suggest whether it is a win or a loss by the fifth preview performance. When all of the five preview performances that suggest a loss are executed, it is possible to suggest that all of the variation displays corresponding to the final variation of the special state and the second pending memory are a loss. However, the number of executions of the preview performance and the number of executions of the variable display do not strictly match each other, but only need to be at a level that can be suggested. For example, if any of the variable displays is a win, the number of times the preview effect is executed may be smaller than the number of times the variable display is executed. In this case, it is possible to suggest that the fluctuating display is a hit by giving a preview performance that is executed a smaller number of times than the number of times the fluctuating display is executed until the fluctuating display becomes a hit. In addition, if any variable display is a loss, there may be a case where the number of executions of the preview effect is greater than the number of executions of the variable display. In this way, even if the number of executions of the preview performance and the number of executions of the variable display are different, the number of executions of each other tends to be close, giving the player the impression that the preview performance and the variable display are related. It would be good if you could.

After the fifth preview performance is completed at timing AKT16 shown in FIG. 17-5, a loss response performance is executed in response to the fact that all the preview performances suggesting a loss have been executed. A specific notification that notifies that a jackpot or small hit will not occur due to the execution of a preview performance that suggests a loss or a performance that corresponds to a loss, and that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. is possible. Thereafter, for example, when the special state final variation reaches the final stage, a loss result display AKR01 is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. The loss result display AKR01 may be any display effect that informs the player in a way that the player can recognize the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in the small win game state or the jackpot game state until the special state ends. . Then, at timing AKT21, the special state final variation ends. Following such a final change in the special state, the change display corresponding to the second reserved memory is sequentially executed. In the case shown in Figure 17-5, the display result of the special symbol is a losing symbol in both the final fluctuation in the special state and the fluctuation display based on the reservation information corresponding to 4, which is the upper limit of the second reservation memory number. In response to a "loss", in the variable display of small symbols, the determined small symbols of the losing combination are stopped and displayed. In the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory, in response to the variable display result being "lost", the variable pattern PD1-1 is determined by the determination example AKE05 shown in FIG. 17-4(E), and the short-term In the meantime, the start and end of the variable display is repeated, and at timing AKT22, all the variable displays corresponding to the second reserved memory end.

In the case shown in FIG. 17-6, each preview performance is executed corresponding to each of the timings AKT11 and AKT12, so that a total of two preview performances are executed. Among these, in the first preview presentation, a loss notice indicating a loss is executed, and in the second notice presentation, a win notice indicating a win is executed. After the second preview performance is completed at timing AKT13 shown in FIG. 17-6, a win corresponding performance is executed in response to the execution of the preview performance that is a winning notice. Specification that notifies that a jackpot or small win will occur by executing a preview performance that suggests a win or a performance that corresponds to a win, and that it can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Notification can be executed. Thereafter, for example, when the special state final variation reaches the final stage, a win standby display AKR02 is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. The standby display AKR02 at the time of winning indicates that the player is waiting for a jackpot or small win to occur by, for example, continuing or temporarily displaying the playback of a moving image that is a common background image with at least a part of the winning performance. Any display effect that can be recognized by the player may be sufficient. Then, at timing AKT21, the special state final variation ends. Following such a final change in the special state, the change display corresponding to the second reserved memory is sequentially executed. In the case shown in Figure 17-6, the final variation in the special state and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 1 and 2 both correspond to "losing" where the display result of the special symbol is a losing symbol. Then, in the variable display of small symbols, the fixed small symbol that is the special display result is stopped and displayed. In the variable display where the second retention memory number is 3, in response to a "win" where the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol, in the variable display of the small symbol, the determined small symbol of the winning combination is Stop display. In addition, in response to the variable display result being a "win", one of the variation patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 is determined by the determination example AKE05 shown in Figure 17-4 (E), and the variable display is displayed at timing AKT31. ends, and a jackpot or small win occurs.

In the special state final variation, variation pattern PC1-3 is determined to be the pattern to be used when the display result of the special symbol is "Lose", and variation pattern PC3-3 is determined as the usage pattern when the display result of the special symbol is "Win". Determined by usage pattern. In addition, the variation pattern PC1-3 can be used even if the display result of the variation display that is the final variation of the special state is "lost", even if all the variation displays corresponding to the second pending memory are "lost". , even if any of the variable displays is a "hit", it is determined as the usage pattern. In addition, even if the fluctuation display corresponding to the second pending memory becomes a "win", no matter how many times the fluctuation display becomes a "win", the display result of the fluctuation display that becomes the final fluctuation of the special state If it is a "miss", the variable pattern PC1-3 is determined to be the pattern to be used. The fluctuation pattern PC1-3 and the fluctuation pattern PC3-3 are both fluctuation patterns in which the special figure fluctuation time is 140000 ms. Therefore, the number of variable displays performed before the variable display based on the specific pending information stored as the second pending memory is the first number, and the second number different from the first number. In the final variation of the special state, the variation display time from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived is common. In this way, by making the variation display time constant in the final variation of the special state, it becomes easier to control the effects to execute various effects included in the final variation effect, and reduces the data capacity used for effect control. be able to.

FIG. 17-7 is a flowchart showing the performance symbol variation start process (S801) in the performance control process process (S705). In the performance symbol variation start process, the performance control CPU 101 determines a final performance symbol that will be the final stop symbol of the performance symbols (AKS011). The final stop symbol of the production symbol is the final stop symbol, which is the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31, or the display of a special symbol specified by the display result specification command. It can be determined based on variable display content, such as results. The variable display contents corresponding to the display results of the variable patterns and special symbols may include "non-reach (lose)", "reach (lose)", and "first hit" to "third hit". For example, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a non-reach variation pattern among the losing variation patterns, the variable display content becomes "non-reach (loss)". Further, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a reach variation pattern among the loss variation patterns, the variable display content becomes "reach (loss)". On the other hand, if any of the hit types among 1st special pattern jackpot A, 2nd special pattern jackpot, and small hit via jackpot X is specified as the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specification command. In this case, the variable display content becomes "1st win". As the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specification command, if any of the hit types is specified among the 1st special drawing jackpot B, jackpot Y via small hit, jackpot Z via small hit, variable The display content becomes "2nd win". When the winning type of the first special symbol jackpot C is designated as the display result of the special symbol designated by the display result designation command, the variable display content becomes "third win".

The final performance symbol to be the final stop symbol of the performance symbol is determined so that the left symbol and the right symbol are different and mismatched performance symbols when the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)". The performance control CPU 101 extracts numerical data that becomes a random number for left confirmed symbol determination that is updated by a random counter for generating software random numbers, for example, and extracts numerical data that becomes a left confirmed symbol determination random number that is stored in advance in the ROM 102 and is prepared in a left confirmed symbol determination table. The left confirmed performance symbol to be stopped and displayed in the performance symbol display area 9L from among the confirmed performance symbols may be determined by referring to . Next, extract numerical data that will become a random number for determining the right fixed symbol that is updated by a random counter or the like for generating a software random number, and refer to a prepared right fixed symbol determining table that is stored in advance in the ROM 102. Accordingly, it is only necessary to determine the right confirmed performance symbol to be stopped and displayed in the performance symbol display area 9R among the confirmed performance symbols. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right confirmed performance symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed performance symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data to be used as a random number for determining a medium-determined symbol that is updated by a random counter for generating a software random number is extracted, and a medium-determined symbol determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 102 is referred to. Accordingly, it is only necessary to determine a medium-determined performance symbol to be stopped and displayed in the performance symbol display area 9C among the determined performance symbols.

The final performance symbol to be the final stop symbol of the performance symbol is determined so that the left symbol and the right symbol are the same and match when the variable display content is "reach (lose)". The production control CPU 101 extracts numerical data that becomes the left and right fixed symbol determination random numbers that are updated by a random counter for generating software random numbers, for example, and creates a left and right fixed symbol determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 102 and prepared. It is sufficient to determine performance symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed together in the performance symbol display area 9L and the performance symbol display area 9R among the confirmed performance symbols by referring to the above. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data that becomes a random number for determining a medium-determined pattern that is updated by a random counter for generating a software random number, etc., and by referring to a medium-determined pattern determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 102 and prepared. , it is only necessary to determine the medium confirmed performance symbol that is stopped and displayed in the performance symbol display area 9C among the confirmed performance symbols. Here, if the confirmed performance symbols become a winning combination, such as when the symbol number of the medium confirmed performance symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed performance symbol and the right confirmed performance symbol, for example, 1 By adding or subtracting an arbitrary value to the symbol number of the medium guaranteed performance symbol, the determined performance symbol may be made to become a reach combination instead of a winning combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium guaranteed performance symbol, a symbol difference that is the difference between the symbol numbers of the left confirmed performance symbol and the right guaranteed performance symbol may be determined, and the medium confirmed performance symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

The final stop symbol of the production symbol is the final stop symbol, and if the variable display content is one of "1st hit" to "3rd win", the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are the same and match. It is determined to be a performance pattern. For example, when the variable display content is "first win", it is only necessary to be able to determine the final performance symbol of the winning combination using the gold 7 performance symbol. In addition, when the variable display content is "second win", it is only necessary to be able to determine the determined performance symbol of the winning combination using the red 7 performance symbol. When the variable display content is "3rd win", the performance control CPU 101 extracts numerical data that becomes a random number for determining a winning pattern that is updated by, for example, a random counter for generating a software random number. Next, by referring to the winning confirmed symbol determination table stored in the ROM 102 and prepared in advance, the confirmed effect design of the winning combination using any of the effect symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 is determined. It is sufficient if it can be determined.

If the variable display content is one of "1st win" to "3rd win", a decision may be made as to whether or not to execute a symbol promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect. . In the re-lottery performance, the performance symbols of the winning combination using any of the performance symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 are temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display of the performance symbols, so that the winning type is changed to the first one. It is once possible to recognize that it is a special jackpot C or a jackpot Z via small hit, and the fixed effect pattern of the winning combination using the gold 7 or red 7 effect pattern stops due to the re-variation in which the effect pattern is displayed variably again. By displaying this, the player can be informed that the winning type will be advantageous to the player. In addition, after the production symbols are changed again by the re-lottery production, the final production symbol of the winning combination using any of the production symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 will be stopped and displayed, etc. In some cases, the player may not be notified that the winning type will be advantageous to the player. When it is determined to perform the re-lottery performance, it is sufficient to determine a combination of performance symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed together with the confirmed performance symbols before the execution of the re-lottery performance.

After determining the confirmed performance symbols etc. in AKS011, a small symbol determination process is executed (89AKS01). In the small symbol determination process, a fixed small symbol, etc. that will be the display result in the variable display of small symbols is determined. Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the final change in the special state (89AKS51). Then, if it is the final variation of the special state, a setting is made to start displaying the effect symbols without displaying the effect symbols (89AKS52). Thereby, with the execution of the final variation of the special state, it is possible to execute variable display of small symbols as a non-display state in which no performance symbols are displayed. When starting to hide the performance symbols, for example, by setting a performance symbol non-display flag, it is sufficient to memorize that the performance symbols are in a non-display state.

If it is determined in 89AKS51 that it is not the final variation of the special state, it is determined whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is variation pattern PD1-1 (89AKS53). At this time, if the variation pattern is not PD1-1, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern is not displayed (89AKS54). For example, if the performance symbol non-display flag is on, it may be determined that the performance symbol is not displayed, and if the performance symbol non-display flag is off, it may be determined that the performance symbol is not hidden. If the effect pattern is not displayed in 89AKS54, the normal return setting of the effect pattern display is performed to display the effect pattern (89AKS55). Thereby, after the performance symbols are hidden, the display of the performance symbols can be returned to the normal display state in response to a variation pattern other than the variation pattern PD1-1. In 89AKS55, for example, by resetting the performance symbol non-display flag, it is sufficient to memorize that the performance symbols are in the normal display state.

Next, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (AKS012). The performance control pattern may include control data for controlling performances by various performance devices according to the elapsed time after starting the variation of the performance symbols during the variable display of the performance symbols. When the production control pattern is determined, for example, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in the RAM 103 is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command (AKS013). In addition, settings are made to start changing the effect symbols and the like on the screen of the effect display device 9 (AKS014). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern to the VDP 109, the fluctuation of the performance symbols in the performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and the small symbol display area 9K are controlled. It is only necessary to make it possible to start the fluctuation of the small symbols in . Thereafter, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during production symbol variation (S802) (AKS015), and the process is ended.

FIG. 17-8 (A1) shows an example of determining a final performance symbol that will be the final stop symbol of the performance symbols according to the winning type. In AKS011 of the performance symbol variation start process, when the variable display content is one of "first win" to "third win", the final performance symbol of the winning combination according to the variable display content is determined. At this time, if the winning type is either 1st special drawing jackpot A, 2nd special drawing jackpot, or jackpot X via small winning, the variable display content corresponds to "1st winning", A fixed effect design for a winning combination using the symbols is determined. In addition, when the winning type is either 1st special jackpot B, jackpot Y via small hit, or jackpot Z via small hit, the variable display content corresponds to "2nd win", and the red 7 production pattern A confirmed performance pattern for a winning combination using is determined. When the winning type is the 1st special jackpot C, the variable display content corresponds to "3rd winning" and is a winning combination using any of the production symbols showing numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9. The final production pattern is determined.

As a result, when the winning type is the first special jackpot A, the performance symbol of gold 7 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the performance symbol. The gold 7 performance pattern is a performance pattern whose display color is gold and shows the number 7. When the winning type is the first special jackpot B, the red 7 effect pattern can be derived as the final stop pattern of the effect patterns. The red 7 effect pattern is a effect pattern whose display color is red and shows the number 7. When the winning type is the first special jackpot C, any of the performance symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8, and 9 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the performance symbols. If the winning type is the second special jackpot, the performance symbol of gold 7 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the performance symbol. When the winning type is jackpot X via small hit, the production symbol of gold 7 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the production symbol. When the hit type is a small hit via jackpot Y, a red 7 performance symbol can be derived as the final stop symbol of the performance symbol. When the hit type is a jackpot Z via small hit, the red 7 effect pattern can be derived as the final stop pattern of the effect patterns.

FIG. 17-8 (A2) shows an example of determining a final performance symbol that will be the final stop symbol of the performance symbols according to the variation patterns PC1-3 and PD1-1. The variation pattern PC1-3 is a pattern that can be determined when the variable display result is "lost" in the final variation of the special state. The variation pattern PD1-1 is a pattern that can be determined when the variable display result is "lost" in the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the special state. In AKS011 of the performance symbol variation start process, when the variable display result is a "loss", a fixed performance symbol of a loss combination according to the variation pattern is determined. In the determination example shown in FIG. 17-8 (A2), when the variation pattern is PC1-3, the final performance symbol of the reach-loss combination is determined. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PD1-1, a fixed performance symbol of a non-ready combination is determined. As a result, when the variable display result becomes "loss" in the final variation of the special state, it is possible to derive the final performance symbol of the reach-loss combination, while the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state If the variable display result is a "lose", it is possible to derive a fixed performance symbol of a non-reach combination. In this way, the final variation of the special state has a fixed effect pattern that can be derived when the variable display result is a "lose", and the variable display result is a "lose" in the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state. ”, it is possible to derive different types of display results in terms of whether it is a reach-loss combination or a non-reach combination.

In the case of the variation pattern PC1-3, a fixed production symbol of a non-reach combination may be determined. For example, in the variable display corresponding to the final change of the special state and the second reserved memory at the end of the special state, if the variable display result is "loss", the non- A fixed production pattern for the reach combination is determined. In this case, it becomes possible to derive the final performance symbol of the non-reach combination in response to the variable display result being a "loss" in the final variation of the special state, and further, the variation corresponding to the second pending memory at the end of the special state. In the display, it is possible to derive fixed performance symbols for non-reach combinations in response to the variable display result being a "lose". In this way, in the variable display corresponding to the final variation of the special state and the second reserved memory at the end of the special state, if the variable display result is "lost", the final effect pattern that can be derived is In terms of non-reachable combinations, it may be possible to derive display results in a common manner.

FIG. 17-8(B) shows a configuration example of small symbols that can be displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. In the small symbol display area 9K, similar to the performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, small symbols representing numbers 1 to 9 are variably displayed as left symbols, middle symbols, and right symbols, for example. Further, the small pattern showing the number 7 includes a small pattern whose display color is red and shows the number 7, and a small pattern whose display color is gold and shows the number 7. A small pattern whose display color is red and shows the number 7 is also referred to as a small pattern of red 7. A small pattern whose display color is gold and shows the number 7 is also called a gold 7 small pattern. The small symbols showing the numbers 1-6, 8, and 9 are numbered 1-6, 8, and 9, respectively. The small symbol of red 7 has a symbol number of 7A. The small symbol of gold 7 has a symbol number of 7B.

In the small symbol display area 9K, a small symbol corresponding to the confirmed effect symbol that is the display result of the effect symbol and becomes the final stop symbol of the effect image is displayed as a confirmed small image that is the display result of the small image and the final stop symbol of the effect symbol. It may be possible to derive For example, in the variable display excluding the variable display corresponding to the final variation of the special state and the second reserved memory at the end of the special symbol, the variable display result is determined depending on whether it is a "loss" or a "win". A determined small pattern corresponding to a production pattern is derived. In addition, in the variable display corresponding to the final change of the special state and the second reserved memory at the end of the special symbol, if the variable display result becomes "lost" in response to all the variable displays, the variable display corresponding to the confirmed production symbol Deriving a fixed small pattern. On the other hand, in the variable display corresponding to the final change of the special state and the second reserved memory at the end of the special symbol, when the variable display result is "hit" in response to any of the variable displays, the confirmed effect symbol In some cases, a fixed small pattern that is partially different from the above may be derived. Confirmed small symbols that are partially different from the confirmed production design include fixed small symbols that have a part in common that constitute the confirmed production design, such as the left symbol and right symbol, and small symbols that show the letter V in the medium design. This results in a special display result consisting of a special small pattern that is not included in the confirmed small pattern corresponding to the performance pattern.

If a final stop symbol that is the final stop symbol that is the display result of the small symbol is a determined small symbol of a winning combination using the red 7 small symbol, the red 7 production symbol is used as the final stop symbol that is the display result of the production symbol. In response to the derivation of the final performance symbol of the winning combination using It will be one of the via jackpot Z. If a determined small symbol of a winning combination using the small symbol of gold 7 is derived as the final stop symbol which is the display result of the small symbol, the performance symbol of gold 7 is used as the final stop symbol which is the display result of the performance symbol. Corresponding to the fact that the final effect design of the winning combination is derived using The first special map jackpot A, the second special map jackpot, and the jackpot X via a small hit are all advantageous to the player. In this way, when the player is controlled to the second advantageous state which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, as a display result of the effect symbols and small symbols, specific effects such as the effect symbols and small symbols of red 7 and gold 7 are displayed. A specific display result consisting only of symbols is derived.

The small pattern showing the letter V in the middle pattern is given a pattern number of 10. The small pattern that shows the letter V in the medium pattern is a special pattern that is not included in the small patterns that can be displayed during variable display. By deriving a special display result that includes a special small symbol indicating the letter V in the medium symbol as the final stop symbol which is the display result of the small symbol, a variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state is achieved. In any of the above, the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol, and it is possible to suggest that a jackpot or a small prize will occur. In addition, in the variation display that becomes the final variation of the special state, if the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol and a jackpot or small prize occurs, the temporary stop small symbol using the special small symbol will be temporarily stopped. It may be displayed and then varied again to derive a determined small symbol of a winning combination. The small symbol showing the letter V in the middle symbol is also called the V symbol, and is a special symbol for suggesting when the special state ends. The small pattern indicating the letter V is not limited to being included in the medium pattern, and may be included in part or all of the displayable pattern row, including the left pattern and the right pattern. If it is included in a pattern other than the medium pattern, in the following explanation, the small pattern indicating the letter V may be applied to the pattern other than the medium pattern.

FIG. 17-9 is a flowchart showing the small symbol determination process (89AKS01) in the production symbol variation start process (S801). In the small symbol determination process, the performance control CPU 101 selects the final stop small symbol corresponding to the final stop symbol that is the final stop symbol that is the display result of the performance symbol, as the final stop symbol that is the final stop symbol that is the display result of the small symbol. Determine the symbol (89AKS11). For example, if a production pattern showing the numbers 1 to 9 has the same pattern number as a small pattern showing the numbers 1 to 9, excluding special small patterns, the same pattern number as the fixed production pattern The small symbol to which the symbol number is attached may be determined as the final stop small symbol.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a setting for winning pending standby (89AKS12). For example, if the win pending standby flag is on, it may be determined that there is a win pending standby setting. The hit pending standby flag may be set and turned on in 89AKS33 of the small symbol change setting process shown in FIG. 17-21. If there is no setting of hit pending waiting, it is determined whether the variation pattern PC3-3 is the variation pattern in the current variation display (89AKS19). If it is a variation pattern other than the variation pattern PC3-3, the process is ended as it is, and the determined small symbol is determined to correspond to the determined performance symbol.

If the variation pattern PC3-3 is the variation pattern in the current variation display, a temporary stop small symbol using a special symbol is determined (89AKS20). Temporary stop small symbols are a combination of small symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed during variable display of small symbols before deriving a fixed small symbol that is the final display result of the display of the small symbols. For example, in 89AKS20, the temporary stop small symbol may be determined by changing the medium symbol among the final stop small symbols determined in 89AKS11 to a special symbol indicating the letter V. In addition, in 89AKS20, among the final stop small symbols determined in 89AKS11, the left and right symbols are also changed to the same small symbol with a different symbol number, and the small symbol that becomes the middle symbol is changed to the same small symbol with a different symbol number. The temporary stop small pattern may be determined by changing the small pattern to a small pattern showing the letters , V. The same small symbol to which a different symbol number is changed at this time may be a small symbol whose symbol number is other than 7A and 7B. When the small symbols with symbol numbers 7A and 7B, which are specific symbols, are once stopped and displayed as temporary stop small symbols, the expectation that they will be an advantageous hit type for the player will be increased, and then another symbol number will be displayed. If the attached confirmed small symbols are derived, there is a risk that the player's expectations will be reduced. Therefore, when determining a temporary stop small symbol in 89AKS20, a restriction may be set so that a small symbol that is a specific symbol is not determined.

If there is a setting in 89AKS12 for a win pending, it is determined whether or not the current variable display result is a "jackpot" (89AKS13). Here, when the variable display result becomes "Jackpot", not only the case where the winning type is 1st special drawing jackpot A to 1st special drawing jackpot C or the 2nd special drawing jackpot, but also the case where the winning type is small hit. It also includes the case of a via jackpot X to a small hit via jackpot Z. If the variable display result is a "jackpot", the setting of pending win is erased (89AKS14) and the process is ended. For example, the winning pending standby flag may be reset. Thereby, the confirmed small symbol is determined to correspond to the confirmed performance symbol, and when the subsequent variable display is executed, there is no setting of hit pending standby.

If the variable display result in 89AKS13 is a "loss" and not a "jackpot", the medium symbol among the final stop small symbols determined in 89AKS11 will be changed to a special symbol showing the letter V. Change (89AKS16). In this way, although there is a win pending standby setting, regarding the current variable display, the variable display result is not a "jackpot" but a "loss", and if a jackpot or small hit does not occur based on the current variable display, , it is possible to derive a special display result in which the medium symbol in the determined small symbol is changed to a special symbol. In this case, in the determined small symbol, it is determined whether the left symbol and the right symbol are a combination of specific symbols (89AKS17). If it is not a combination of specific symbols, the process is terminated, thereby making it possible to derive the special display result configured by the change in 89AKS16. If it is a combination of specific symbols, the left symbol or the right symbol in the determined small symbol is changed to a small symbol other than the specific symbol (89AKS18), and then the process is ended. As a result, the determined small symbol different from the special symbol constituting the special display result includes a small symbol different from the specific symbol.

FIG. 17-10 is a flowchart showing the performance symbol variation process (S802) in the performance control process process (S705). In the performance symbol variation processing, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (AKS021). For example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, etc., it may be determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, it is determined whether this is the final change in the special state (AKS022). If it is the final variation of the special state, final variation effect processing is executed (89AKS02). If it is not the final change in the special state, performance control according to the performance control pattern is executed (AKS023), and the process ends.

When the variable display time has elapsed in AKS021, it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (AKS024). At this time, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the process ends and waits. Furthermore, after the variable display time has elapsed, if a predetermined period of time passes without receiving a symbol confirmation designation command, a predetermined error process will be performed in response to the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command could not be received normally. It may be executed. When a design confirmation designation command is received, for example, a display control command is transmitted to the VDP 109, and a final stop symbol or final stop symbol is derived as a display result of the performance symbol or small symbol. Performs display control to display (AKS025). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving the winning start designation command (AKS026). Thereafter, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production symbol variation stop processing (S803) (AKS027), and the process is ended.

FIG. 17-11 is a flowchart showing the final variation production process (89AKS02) in the production symbol variation process (S802). In the final variation effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the start of variation corresponds to the start of the current variation display (AKS101). If it is the start of a change, settings are made to start playing the moving image corresponding to the final change in the special state (AKS102). The moving image corresponding to the final change in the special state may be continuously played back and displayed as a background image, for example, during the period in which the final change in the special state and the display of the change corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state are executed. It is fine as long as it is possible. It may be possible to perform animation display of still images instead of or in addition to reproducing and displaying moving images.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the acquisition performance period (AKS103). The acquisition performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern determined by AKS012 of the performance symbol variation start process. If it is the acquisition performance period, acquisition performance processing is executed (AKS104). Further, it is determined whether or not it is the expectation level increasing performance period (AKS105). The expectation level up performance period may be predetermined in the performance control pattern determined by AKS012 of the performance symbol variation start process, for example. If it is the expectation level increasing performance period, an expectation level increasing performance process is executed (AKS106). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the preview performance period (AKS107). The preview performance period may be determined in advance, for example, in the performance control pattern determined by AKS012 of the performance symbol variation start process. Alternatively, the preview performance period may be set according to the number of preview executions determined in the acquisition performance process. If it is the preview performance period, a preview performance process is executed (AKS108). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is the display result corresponding performance period (AKS109). The display result corresponding performance period may be determined in advance in the performance control pattern determined by AKS012 of the performance symbol variation start process, for example. However, the display result corresponding performance period may be set according to the preview performance period so that it can be started when the preview performance period ends. If it is the display result corresponding effect period, display result corresponding effect processing is executed (AKS110).

FIG. 17-12 is a flowchart showing the acquisition effect processing (AKS104) in the final variation effect processing (89AKS02). In the acquisition performance processing, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not the acquisition performance has started corresponding to the start of the acquisition performance (AKS 201). If the acquisition performance has started, the pending data is confirmed (AKS 202). The pending data is storage data that can specify the notification content of the symbol designation command transmitted from the main board 31, and may be stored in the storage area of the pending related data storage section provided in the RAM 103 as long as it can be saved. Thereafter, based on the confirmation result of the pending data, the presence or absence of a winning notice and the winning notice number are determined (90AKS01). The hit notice is a win-suggesting notice performance that suggests that a jackpot or a small win will occur. The winning notice number is a number indicating the order in which a notice performance that becomes a winning notice is to be executed among a plurality of notice performances.

Next, as a result of the decision made in 90AKS01, it is determined whether or not there is no winning notice, in which no notice performance that is a winning notice is executed (90AKS02). If there is no notice of winning, the number of times the notice of loss is executed is determined (90AKS03). The number of executions of a notice at the time of loss is the number of times a notice performance that becomes a notice of a loss is executed. The loss notice is a notice performance that suggests that a jackpot or small win will not occur. If there is a winning notice to execute a notice performance that is a winning notice, the number of times of notice execution corresponding to the winning notice number is set (90AKS04). Additionally, a small symbol variation setting process is executed (89AKS03).

Subsequently, acquisition character determination processing is executed (90AKS05). In the acquisition character determination process, it is possible to determine the number of character panel images to be displayed that are specific images in the acquisition performance and the characters shown in each character panel image. The number of displayed character panel images serving as specific images in the acquisition performance is also referred to as the number of acquired characters. The characters shown in each character panel image are also referred to as preview characters. The advance notice character may be a win notice character when a win notice is executed, or a lose notice character when a loss notice is executed. After executing the acquisition character determination process, control is performed to start acquisition promotion notification (AKS 203). For example, it is only necessary that the acquisition promotion notification can be executed by displaying an effect image in a display mode corresponding to the acquisition promotion notification at the notification display position on the screen of the effect display device 9. In addition to displaying the effect image, the acquisition promotion notification may be performed by outputting audio, lighting a lamp, moving a movable object, or a combination of some or all of these. It also performs control to start timer update display (AKS 204). For example, at the timer display position on the screen of the effect display device 9, a timer display of "20:00" indicating 20 seconds remaining may be started, and the timer display may be counted down according to the elapsed time.

If the acquisition performance has not started in AKS201, it is determined whether it is time to increase the number of acquired characters (90AKS06). The timing for increasing the number of acquired characters may be set in advance, for example, when the acquired character determination process (90AKS05) is executed, based on the number of acquired characters and the determination result of the preview character. If it is time for an increase in the number of acquired characters, control is performed to notify the increase in the number of acquired characters (90AKS07). Next, it is determined whether there is a second starting prize (90AKS08). For example, when the second starting winning designation command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, it may be determined that there is a second starting winning. The second starting winning designation command is used for performance control when the second starting opening switch 14a is in the ON state, even if the second pending memory number has reached the upper limit in the starting opening switch passing process (S311). It is sufficient if it can be transmitted to the microcomputer 100. If there is a second starting prize, control is performed to execute a winning notification effect (90AKS09).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not to end the acquisition performance (AKS 205). For example, based on the control data read from the acquisition performance control pattern, when the end of the acquisition performance is designated, it may be determined that the acquisition performance is to be ended. If the acquisition performance is not finished, the process is finished. On the other hand, when ending the acquisition performance, control is performed to end the acquisition promotion notification (AKS 206). It is also determined whether the number of acquired characters is the maximum value of 5 (AKS 207). If the number of acquired characters is other than 5, the process ends. If the number of acquired characters is 5, control is performed to notify acquisition completion (AKS 208). For example, it is only necessary that the acquisition completion notification can be executed by displaying an effect image in a display mode corresponding to the acquisition completion notification at the notification display position on the screen of the effect display device 9. In addition to displaying the effect image, acquisition completion notification may be executed by audio output, lighting of a lamp, movement of a movable object, or a combination of some or all of these.

FIG. 17-13 shows a display example when the acquisition effect is executed. FIG. 17-13(A) shows a display example 90AK01 when the acquisition effect is started. When the acquisition effect is executed, panel preparation images are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at five panel display positions 90AKA1 to 90AKA5 shown in FIG. 17-13(A), and panel preparation images are displayed at the notification display position 90AKB1. An acquisition promotion notification image is displayed, and a timer image is displayed at the timer display position 90AKC1. The panel preparation image is a performance image indicating that a character panel image can be displayed in the acquisition performance. For example, in response to the fact that the maximum number of character panel images to be displayed is 5, panel preparation images indicating numbers 1 to 5 are displayed in a predetermined order at five panel display positions 90AKA1 to 90AKA5. Bye. The acquisition promotion notification image is a performance image for promoting the firing of game balls aiming at the second starting prize opening 14 during execution of the acquisition performance. The acquisition promotion notification image is displayed together with the right-handed hitting promotion notification image in the right-handed hitting display area 9Z, thereby promoting the hitting of the game ball into the right-handed hitting path, which is the second path in which the second starting prize opening 14 is provided. You may also encourage right-handed hitting. In the display example 90AK01, an acquisition promotion notification image including a character image indicating a message "Collect characters!" is displayed at the notification display position 90AKB1. The timer image is an effect image for executing a timer display that counts down according to the elapsed time after the acquisition effect is started. In the display example 90AK01, a timer image is displayed at the timer display position 90AKC1 to start the timer display of "20:00" indicating 20 seconds remaining.

FIG. 17-13(B) shows a display example 90AK02 in which the acquisition effect is in progress. In the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12, when it is time to increase the number of acquired characters in 90AKS06, the increase in the number of acquired characters is notified under the control of 90AKS07. In the display example 90AK02, when the third character panel image is displayed, the display at the panel display position 90AKA3 is changed from displaying the panel preparation image to displaying the character panel image. At this time, an increase effect display may be performed to notify the increase in the number of acquired characters. The effect display upon increase may include displaying a first effect image added around the increased character panel image and displaying a second effect image different from the first effect image. The second effect image is, for example, a character that has increased from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9, corresponding to the arrangement position where the second starting prize opening 14 is provided in the right-handed route that is the second route. Any effect image that shows how the effect is applied to the panel image may be used. By displaying such an effect image, it is possible to give the player the impression that the number of displayed character panel images has increased in response to the game ball entering the second starting prize opening 14. However, in reality, the timing for increasing the number of acquired characters is set in advance when the acquired character determination process of 90AKS05 is executed in the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12. Therefore, in the acquisition performance, regardless of whether a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 14 or not, when the preset timing for increasing the number of acquired characters is reached, the number of character panel images displayed as a specific image is increased. can be done. In this way, in the acquisition performance, while giving the impression that the player is involved in increasing the number of acquired characters by displaying effect images, it also ensures that the number of character panel images to be displayed determined based on the second retention memory number, etc. can be done.

The performance mode of the acquisition promotion notification may be different depending on whether the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit of 4 or not. In the AKS 203 of the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12, it is determined whether or not the second pending storage number is the upper limit value. Depending on the result of this determination, the display mode of the effect image, the sound output mode, the lamp lighting mode, the movable object operation mode, or a combination of some or all of these are set differently. For example, if the number of second reserved memories is not the upper limit, the display size of the effect image may be made larger than if it is the upper limit, or a effect image including a text image indicating a different message such as "Insufficient power!" It is sufficient if arbitrary acquisition promotion notifications with different performance modes can be executed, such as displaying , or displaying in a different display color such as red, which is different from the usual black. The acquisition promotion notification when the second pending storage number is not the upper limit value may be a special promotion notification.

FIG. 17-13(C) shows a display example 90AK03 when the acquisition performance ends. In the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12, when the AKS 205 ends the acquisition effect, the acquisition promotion notification is ended under the control of the AKS 206. In the display example 90AK03, at the notification display position 90AKB2, the acquisition promotion notification has ended by erasing the display of the acquisition promotion notification image. In addition, in the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12, when the number of acquired characters is 5 in AKS 207, acquisition completion notification is executed under the control of AKS 208. In the display example 90AK03, the acquisition completion notification image is displayed at the notification display position 90AKB2. The acquisition completion notification image is a performance image for notifying that the number of displayed character panel images serving as a specific image has reached the maximum display number of five. In display example 90AK03, at notification display position 90AKB2, an acquisition completion notification image including a character image indicating the message "Acquisition completed!" is displayed. By executing such acquisition completion notification, the player can recognize that the number of displayed specific images has reached the maximum value.

FIG. 17-14 shows an example of setting a character panel image that can be displayed as a specific image. The character panel image includes a panel frame partial image, which is a performance image in which the display color of the panel frame serving as the outer frame can be set, and a character partial image, which is a performance image that shows the character in the display area within the panel frame. It consists of The panel frame partial image displays, for example, a white effect image as the normal display color. When a character panel image is displayed in the acquisition performance, a character panel image including a white panel frame partial image is displayed. Furthermore, when the expectation level increasing effect is executed, the panel frame partial image can be changed to a red or gold effect image different from white, for example, as a changed display color.

FIGS. 17-14 (A1) to (E1) show character panel images including white panel frame partial images. FIGS. 17-14 (A2) to (E2) show character panel images including a red panel frame partial image. FIGS. 17-14 (A3) to (E3) show character panel images including golden panel frame partial images. FIGS. 17-14 (A1), (A2), and (A3) show character panel images including character partial images of the first character AKC1. FIGS. 17-14 (B1), (B2), and (B3) show character panel images including character partial images of the second character AKC2. FIGS. 17-14 (C1), (C2), and (C3) show character panel images including character partial images of the third character AKC3. FIGS. 17-14 (D1), (D2), and (D3) show character panel images including character partial images of the fourth character AKC4. FIGS. 17-14 (E1), (E2), and (E3) show character panel images including character partial images of the fifth character AKC5.

Regarding the character partial image included in the character panel image, in the acquisition performance, the expectation level is highest when the character panel image including the character partial image of the fifth character AKC5 is displayed, and The expectation of winning decreases as the character becomes AKC3 and the second character AKC2, and the expectation of winning is lowest when a character panel image including a character partial image of the first character AKC1 is displayed. In addition, regarding the character partial image included in the character panel image, in the acquisition effect, the advantage of the special state is highest when the character panel image including the character partial image of the fifth character AKC5 is displayed, , the third character AKC3, and the second character AKC2, the advantage of the special state decreases, and when the character panel image including the character partial image of the first character AKC1 is displayed, the advantage of the special state is the lowest. Become. In the variable display of the second special symbol, when the hit type is jackpot X via small hit, the number of variable displays that can be executed in the special state as the post-win control state is 100 times, and the hit type is jackpot Y via small hit. Or, in the case of a jackpot Z via a small hit, the number of times of fluctuation display that can be executed in the special state as the post-win control state is 15. Therefore, the higher the percentage of the winning type is jackpot X via small hit, the higher the advantage of the special state becomes, and the higher the percentage of the winning type is jackpot Y via small win or jackpot Z via small win, the higher the advantage of the special state. advantage becomes lower. In addition, the high-low relationship in the hit expectancy and special state advantage regarding character partial images is a relationship that is established when comparing character panel images including panel frame partial images with the same display color, and with different display colors. This may not hold true when character panel images including panel frame partial images are compared.

Regarding the panel frame partial image included in the character panel image, the expectation level is highest when the character panel image containing the golden panel frame partial image is displayed, and the character panel image containing the red panel frame partial image is displayed. The expectation of winning is the second highest after gold, and the lowest is the expectation of winning when a character panel image including a white panel frame image is displayed. Note that the relationship between the levels of hit expectations regarding panel frame partial images is a relationship that is established when comparing character panel images that include character partial images that have the same character, and character panel images that include character partial images that have different characters. This may not hold true when comparing.

FIG. 17-15(A) shows a configuration example of the suspension-related data storage unit AKM01 provided in the RAM 103. The suspension-related data storage unit AKM01 stores various data related to the first suspension storage and various data related to the second suspension storage as suspension-related data. The reservation-related data storage section AKM01 includes a first reservation-related data storage section corresponding to the first reservation memory regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second reservation memory regarding the variable display of the second special symbol regarding the second special symbol. A corresponding second suspension-related data storage section may be provided. The reservation related data storage unit AKM01 has a storage area for storing data that specifiably indicates symbol designation and variation type designation in association with the reservation number, for example. The symbol designation that can be stored by the pending related data indicates the content of notification by the symbol designation command. The variation type designation that can be stored in the hold-related data indicates the content specified by the variation type command. In AKS202 of the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12, the reservation related data stored in the second reservation related data storage section of the reservation related data storage section AKM01 may be confirmed as reservation data.

The pending data may be checked not only when the acquisition performance is started, but also when the variable display corresponding to the final change in the special state is started, for example. Alternatively, even after the acquisition performance has started, the pending data may be checked every time a second starting prize occurs, and the performance mode such as the acquisition performance may be changed.

FIG. 17-15(B) shows an example of the configuration of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 provided in the RAM 103. The final variation performance data storage unit AKM02 stores various data used to execute the final variation performance as final variation performance data. The final variation performance data storage unit AKM02 has a storage area for storing data that specifiably indicates, for example, a character, an outer frame, an expectation level increase setting, and a preview content in association with a preview number. The preview number corresponds to the order in which the preview performances are executed in the final variation performance. The character that can be stored by the final variation performance data specifies the character indicated by the character partial image included in the character panel image. The outer frame that can be stored by the final variation effect data specifies the display color of the panel frame partial image included in the character panel image. The expectation level increase setting that can be stored in the final variation effect data specifies the conditions for changing the display mode of the character panel image in the expectation level increase effect and the display color after the change. The preview content that can be stored by the final variation performance data specifies whether the suggestion by the preview performance is a loss suggestion or a win suggestion. When the performance control CPU 101 starts executing the acquisition performance or the expectation level increasing performance, the final variation performance data according to the determination result of the performance content is stored in the storage area of the final variation performance data storage unit AKM02. do it.

FIG. 17-16(A) shows an example 90AKD01 of determining the winning notice timing. The winning notice timing is the timing at which a notice effect serving as a winning notice is executed. In the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12, the winning notification timing is determined according to the order of the notification effects by determining the winning notification number in 90AKS01. When executing a preview performance that is a winning notice, a fluctuation display that is a winning fluctuation from which a jackpot symbol or a small winning symbol is derived is specified. When the final variation in the special state is executed, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not the final variation display will be a winning variation based on the contents specified by the display result designation command. Further, by reading the design designation of the reservation related data stored in the reservation related data storage unit AKM01, it is sufficient to specify the reservation number of the variable display that causes the winning fluctuation. In addition, if there are multiple winning fluctuations, the fluctuation display executed first is used. When the winning notice number is 1, a winning notice in a performance mode that suggests a win is executed as the first notice performance. When the winning notice number is 2, a winning notice is executed as the second notice performance. When the winning notice number is 3, a winning notice is executed as the third notice performance. When the winning notice number is 4, the winning notice is executed as the fourth notice performance. When the winning notice number is 5, a winning notice is executed as the fifth notice performance.

In determination example 90AKD01, when the winning variation is the special state final variation, the winning notification number is determined to be 1 with a determination rate of 100%. If the winning variation is the first one in the second holding memory, that is, the holding number is 1, the winning notification number is determined to be 1 with a 70% determination rate, and the winning notification number is determined to be 1 with a 30% determination rate. The number is determined to be 2. If the winning variation is the second one in the second hold memory, that is, the holding number is 2, the winning notification number is determined to be 1 at a 30% determination rate, and the winning notification number is determined at a 60% determination rate. The number is determined to be 2, and the winning notice number is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 10%. If the winning variation is the third one in the second hold memory, that is, the holding number is 3, the winning notification number is determined to 1 with a 10% determination rate, and the winning notification number is determined with a 30% determination rate. The number is determined to be 2, the winning notification number is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 50%, and the winning notification number is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 10%. If the winning variation is the 4th one in the second hold memory, that is, the holding number is 4, the winning notification number is determined to 1 with a 10% determination rate, and the winning notification number is determined with a 10% determination rate. The number is determined to be 2, the winning notification number is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 30%, the winning notification number is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 40%, and the winning notification number is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 10%. be done. If there is no change in winnings, the winning notification number is not determined and the notification effect serving as a winning notification is not executed.

In this way, in decision example 90AKD01, when the value obtained by adding 1 to the pending number corresponding to the fluctuation display that becomes a winning fluctuation is set as the corresponding notice value, the winning pending number is set to a value less than or equal to the corresponding notice value. The decision rate is set. In addition, the determination rate of the winning pending number that is less than the corresponding advance notice value is higher than the determination rate of the corresponding advance notice value. With such a setting, the number of executions of the preview effect tends to be smaller than the total number of times of the variable display that results in a winning variation and the variable display that is executed before the winning variation. This increases the degree of freedom in controlling the preview effects without being constrained by the correspondence between the preview effects and the variable display, and shortens the period until the advance notice effect that suggests a win is executed, giving the player more control. This can prevent giving the impression of being delayed. Note that this is not limited to the determination rate in determination example 90AKD01, and the winning pending number is a value less than the corresponding advance notice value, and the winning notice number is determined to be a value less than the corresponding notice value than the ratio at which the corresponding notice value is determined. Any decision rate may be set so that the rate of determination is high.

Unlike the determination example 90AKD01, the winning notice number may be determined to be a value that exceeds the corresponding notice value. In this case, the number of times the preview effect is executed is greater than the total number of times of the variable display that becomes the winning variation and the variable display that is executed before the winning variation. As a result, the degree of freedom in controlling the preview performance is increased without being constrained by the correspondence between the preview performance and the variable display, and the period until the preview performance that suggests a win is executed is extended, so that the player's It is possible to maintain attention to the preview performance.

FIG. 17-16(B) shows an example 90AKD02 of determining the number of times of notice execution at the time of loss. The number of times of execution of the notice at the time of loss is the number of times that the notice performance that becomes a notice of loss is executed when the notice performance that becomes a notice of winning is not executed. In the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12, the number of times the notice of loss is executed is determined in 90AKS03. In 90AKS03, the number of advance notice executions is determined based on the second pending storage number. In determination example 90AKD02, when the second pending storage number is 0, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 1 at a determination rate of 10%, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 2 at a determination rate of 40%, and the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 2 at a determination rate of 40%. The number of times the notice is executed is determined to be 3 at the determination rate, the number of times the notice is executed is determined to be 4 at the determination rate of 10%, and the number of times the notice is executed is determined to be 5 at the determination rate of 10%. When the number of second pending memories is 1, the number of times of notice execution is determined to be 2 with a determination rate of 10%, the number of times of advance notice execution is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 50%, and the number of times of advance notice execution is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 30%, and the number of times of advance notice execution is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 50%. The number of executions is determined to be 4, and the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 5 at a determination rate of 10%. When the number of second pending memories is 2, the number of times of notice execution is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 10%, the number of times of advance notice execution is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 60%, and the number of times of advance notice execution is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 30%. The number of executions is determined to be five. When the second pending storage number is 3, the number of times of advance notice execution is determined to be 4 at a determination rate of 30%, and the number of times of advance notice execution is determined to be 5 at a determination rate of 70%. When the second pending storage number is 4, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 100%.

In this way, in decision example 90AKD02, when the value obtained by adding 1 to the second pending storage number is the corresponding notice value, the decision rate is set so that the number of notice executions is greater than or equal to the corresponding notice value. has been done. Further, regarding the number of times of notice execution, the determination rate of the value exceeding the corresponding notice value is higher than the determination rate of the corresponding notice value. Due to these settings, if all variable display results corresponding to the special state final variation and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory are "loses", the change corresponding to the special state final variation and the second pending memory The number of times the preview effect is executed is likely to be greater than the total number of times it is displayed. As a result, the degree of freedom in controlling the preview performance is increased without being bound by the correspondence between the preview performance and the fluctuation display, and the period during which the preview performance that suggests a loss is executed is extended, so that the player's ability to respond to fluctuations in winnings is increased. can maintain a sense of expectation. Note that this is not limited to the decision rate in determination example 90AKD02, and the number of executions for failure notice is greater than the corresponding advance notice value, and the number of execution times for failure notice exceeds the corresponding advance notice value than the ratio at which the corresponding advance notice value is determined. Any determination rate may be set so that the rate of determination is high.

In the acquisition performance processing shown in FIG. 17-12, the final variation performance data indicating the determination result of the winning notice number by 90AKS01 and the determination result of the number of executions of the notice at the time of loss by 90AKS03 is stored in the storage area of the final variation performance data storage unit AKM02. You can memorize and save it. For example, when a winning notice number is determined by 90AKS01, the final variation presentation data that specifies a winning suggestion as the notice content is stored in the final variation presentation data storage unit AKM02 in association with the notice number that becomes the winning notice number. Save and store in area. In this case, the final variation effect data specifying a loss suggestion as the notice content is stored in the storage area of the final variation effect data storage part AKM02 in association with a notice number smaller than the winning notice number. As a result, when the number of times the notice is executed corresponding to the winning notice number is set in 90AKS04 of the acquisition effect processing, the losing notice that suggests a loss will be executed as a notice effect that is executed before the winning notice. Settings are now possible. In addition, when the number of executions of the notice at the time of loss is determined by 90AKS03, the final variation performance data that specifies the suggestion of a loss as the content of the notice is linked to the notice number that is less than or equal to the number of executions of the notice at the time of loss. It is stored and saved in the storage area of the storage unit AKM02. As a result, it becomes possible to set a loss notice that suggests a loss to be executed as one or a plurality of notice performances corresponding to the number of times of execution of the notice at the time of loss.

FIG. 17-17 is a flowchart showing the acquisition character determination process (90AKS05) in the acquisition performance process (AKS104). In the acquisition character determination process, the performance control CPU 101 determines the number of acquisition characters (91AKS01). The number of acquired characters is the number of displayed character panel images that are specific images in the acquisition performance. In 91AKS01, the number of acquired characters may be determined, for example, depending on whether or not a preview performance that is a winning notice is executed. Subsequently, the target notice number is set to 1 (90AKS11). The target preview number in the acquisition character determination process is, for example, the target of determination regarding the character in the acquisition performance or preview performance among the preview numbers associated with the storage area of the final variation performance data in the final variation performance data storage unit AKM02. A notice number will be specified.

Next, it is determined whether the target notice number is a winning notice number (90AKS12). The winning notice number can be determined by 90AKS01 of the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12. If it is a winning notification number, a winning notification character is determined (90AKS13). On the other hand, if it is not a winning notification number, a loss notification character is determined (90AKS14). Both of the win notice character and the loss notice character can be determined to be any one of the first character AKC1 to the fifth character AKC5. At this time, it is determined whether the character determined as the win notice character or the loss notice character is one of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 (90AKS15). If the character is one of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the character of the remaining notice number is determined to be either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2 (90AKS16). The final variation effect data indicating the decision results by 90AKS14, 90AKS15, and 90AKS16 may be stored in the storage area of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with the target notice number and the remaining notice number. . If the character of the remaining notice number is one of the third character AKC3 to AKC5 in 90AKS15, the character of the remaining notice number is determined to be either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2 in 90AKS16. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the expectation of winning from becoming excessively high depending on the display mode of the character panel image displayed in the acquisition performance. In addition, even if multiple pieces of specific pending information are stored among the pending information that becomes the second pending memory, the characters from the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 are determined only once, so it is possible to win the jackpot. To prevent a player from recognizing at an early stage that the player is repeatedly controlled to an advantageous state such as a game state or a small winning game state, and to provide an appropriate display performance that maintains a sense of expectation for the advantageous state.

A character panel image that includes a character partial image of any one of the third character AKC3 to fifth character AKC5 is a character panel image that includes a character partial image of a character that is either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2. The expectation of winning and the advantage of special conditions are higher than images. In the acquisition performance, a character panel image containing a character partial image of a character with a high probability of winning or a high advantage of special status is displayed as a character panel image indicating one of the multiple acquired characters. A limit is set in that a character panel image including a character partial image of a character with a high probability of winning or a high degree of advantage in special states is not displayed as a character panel image indicating a character to be acquired thereafter.

90AKS15, if it is either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, but not any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, determine whether the target notice number is the number of times the notice is executed. (90AKS17). If it is not the number of notice executions, the target notice number is increased by 1 (90AKS18). Thereafter, the process returns to 90AKS12 and the acquired characters are sequentially determined. Finally, the acquisition character increase timing is set (90AKS19), and the process ends.

FIGS. 17-18 show an example 91AKD01 of determining the number of acquired characters. In the acquired character determination process shown in FIG. 17-17, the number of acquired characters is determined in 91AKS01. In decision example 91AKD01, if there is no winning notice that does not include a winning notice among the one or more notice performances executed in the final variation display, the number of times the notice is executed is the same as the number of times the notice is executed. The number of acquired characters is determined. Therefore, when a preview performance in which all of the preview performances are loss notices is executed as one or a plurality of preview performances, a number of character panel images corresponding to the number of executions of the preview performance can be displayed in the acquisition performance.

In decision example 91AKD01, if there is a winning notice that includes a winning notice among the one or more notice performances executed in the final variation display, the number of second pending memories is The number of acquired characters is determined by the determination rate. For example, when the number of second reserved memories is 0, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 1 at a determination rate of 10%, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 2 at a determination rate of 40%, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be 2 at a determination rate of 30%. The number of acquired characters is determined to be 3, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 10%, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 10%. If the second pending memory number is 1, the number of characters to be acquired is determined to be 2 with a determination rate of 10%, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 50%, and the number of characters to be acquired is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 30%. The number of characters is determined to be 4, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5 at a determination rate of 10%. When the second pending memory number is 2, the number of characters to be acquired is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 10%, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 60%, and the number of characters to be acquired is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 30%. The number of characters is determined to be five. When the second reserved memory number is 3, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 30%, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 70%. When the second reserved memory number is 4, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 100%.

In this manner, in the determination example 91AKD01, when there is no winning notice, the number of acquired characters is determined to be the same as the number of times the notice is executed. In addition, in determination example 91AKD01, when there is a winning notice, the decision rate is set so that the number of acquired characters is greater than or equal to the corresponding notice value obtained by adding 1 to the second pending memory number. has been done. Regarding the number of acquired characters, the determination rate of the value exceeding the corresponding preview value is higher than the determination rate of the corresponding preview value. These settings are common to the determination rate settings in the determination example 90AKD02 of the number of failure notice executions shown in FIG. 17-16(B). Therefore, the number of acquired characters can be determined at a common determination rate for each corresponding preview value in the case without a winning notice and in the case with a winning notice. As a result, in the acquisition performance, the number of character panel images displayed as a specific image does not indicate the expectation of winning, and the player's attention level is prevented from decreasing at the time the character panel image is displayed. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to subsequent performances. In addition, the number of acquired characters is determined by the determination rate according to the number of second reserved memories regardless of the winning notice number, so you can freely control the acquired effect without being constrained by the correspondence between the notice effect and the variable display. You can increase the degree. Note that this is not limited to the determination rate in Determination Example 91AKD01, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be a value greater than or equal to the corresponding preview value, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be a value that exceeds the corresponding preview value than the rate at which the corresponding forecast value is determined. Any decision rate may be set so that the rate of determination is high.

The number of acquired characters and the second reserved memory number are related in that the number of acquired characters can be determined to be the same value as the corresponding preview value. Furthermore, even when the number of acquired characters is determined to be a value that exceeds the corresponding preview value, the number of acquired characters is determined at a higher rate as the value is closer to the corresponding preview value. In this way, the number of acquired characters and the second reserved storage number are also related in that the number of acquired characters is likely to be determined to a value close to the corresponding preview value. Thereby, in the acquisition performance, it is possible to display the number of character panel images to be displayed that is related to the number of stored pieces of pending information to be the second held memory.

In the determination example 91AKD01, when the second reserved memory number is 4, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5. The acquisition character determination process is executed by 90AKS05 when the acquisition performance is started in AKS201 of the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12. Therefore, when the acquisition performance is started, if the second pending memory number has reached the upper limit of 4, even if the game ball does not pass through the second starting prize opening 14 after that, the number of acquired characters will be is determined to be 5, the number of character panel images to be displayed in the acquisition performance becomes 5, which is the maximum number, and it is possible to display 5 character panel images corresponding to the 5 preview performances.

FIG. 17-19(A) shows an example 90AKD11 of determining the winning preview character. In the acquisition character determination process shown in FIG. 17-17, a winning preview character is determined in 90AKS12. In the determination example 90AKD11, a winning notice character is determined at a determination rate according to the winning type of the symbol designation stored by the reservation related data. For example, if the winning type of the design designation is the second special jackpot or jackpot The second character AKC2 is determined as the winning preview character, the third character AKC3 is determined as the winning preview character with a 15% determination rate, and the fourth character AKC4 is determined as the winning preview character with a 20% determination rate. , the fifth character AKC5 is determined as the winning preview character with a determination rate of 50%. If the specified winning type is jackpot Y via small hit, the first character AKC1 is determined as the hit notification character with a 10% determination rate, and the second character AKC2 is determined as the hit notification character with a 15% determination rate. The third character AKC3 is determined as the winning preview character with a 20% determination rate, the fourth character AKC4 is determined as the winning preview character with a 35% determination rate, and the third character AKC3 is determined as the winning preview character with a 20% determination rate. The 5 character AKC5 is determined as the winning notice character. When the winning type of the symbol designation is jackpot Z via small winning, any one of the first character AKC1 to the fifth character AKC5 is determined as the winning preview character with a determination rate of 20%.

In this way, in determination example 90AKD11, there are two cases in which the hit type of the designation is jackpot X via second special figure jackpot or small hit, jackpot Y via small hit, and jackpot Z via small hit. , the determination rate of the winning preview character is different. After the winning preview character is shown in one of the character panel images displayed in the acquisition performance, the winning preview character, which is a preview performance suggesting a win, is displayed in the preview performance related to the character panel image showing the winning preview character. is executed. When the winning type is either a second special figure jackpot or jackpot X via small winning, the special state can be controlled as a post-win control state until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times. When the hit type is either jackpot Y via small win or jackpot Z via small win, the special state can be controlled as a post-win control state until the number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuating reaches 15 times. Further, when the winning type is jackpot Y via small winning, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is 10, and it is possible to execute up to 10 rounds in which the V big prize opening is in the open state. When the winning type is jackpot Z via small winning, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is 5, and rounds in which the jackpot is opened can be executed up to 5 times. Therefore, depending on which character from the first character AKC1 to the fifth character AKC5 the winning notice character is, the degree of advantage in the jackpot game state and the post-win control state differs, which increases the degree of advantage for the player. are different. Note that the determination rate is not limited to the determination rate in determination example 90AKD11, and any determination rate may be set so that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the winning preview character.

FIG. 17-19(B) shows an example 90AKD12 of determining a character for predicting a loss. In the acquisition character determination process shown in FIG. 17-17, a loss notice character is determined in 90AKS13. In determination example 90AKD12, a character for loss notice is determined with a determination rate according to the loss notice. For example, with a determination rate of 40%, the first character AKC1 is determined to be the character for predicting a loss, with a determination rate of 30%, the second character AKC2 is determined as the character for predicting failure, and with a determination rate of 20%, the third character AKC3 is determined as the character for predicting failure. is determined to be a character for notifying a loss, a fourth character AKC4 is determined to be a character for notifying a loss with a determination rate of 9%, and a fifth character AKC5 is determined to be a character for notifying a loss at a determination rate of 1%.

Thus, in the determination example 90AKD12, the determination rate of the first character AKC1 is the highest, and the determination rate decreases as the second character AKC2, the third character AKC3, and the fourth character AKC4 are selected, and the determination rate of the fifth character AKC5 decreases. The decision rate is the lowest. Due to the setting of the determination rate in determination examples 90AKD11 and 90AKD12, regarding the character partial image included in the character panel image, in the acquisition performance, when the character panel image including the character partial image of the fifth character AKC5 is displayed, the expectation level of winning is increased. The expectation of winning decreases as the characters reach the highest level, the fourth character AKC4, the third character AKC3, and the second character AKC2. degree is lowest. In addition, in the preview performance related to the character panel image showing the character for predicting a loss, a loss notice is executed, which is a preview performance suggesting a loss. Therefore, in the preview performance, the ratio of whether it is a loss suggestion or a win suggestion differs depending on the character indicated by the character panel image displayed in the acquisition performance. Note that the decision rate is not limited to the decision rate in decision example 90AKD12, but any decision rate can be set so that the ratio of whether the related preview effect is a loss notice or a win notice is different depending on the character indicated by the character panel image. It is sufficient if it is set.

FIG. 17-20 shows a control example 90AKE01 of acquisition performance. The acquisition effect is executed during the period from timing AKT02 to timing AKT03 shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6. This period may be a period until a certain period of time, such as 10 seconds, elapses. In the acquisition character determination process shown in FIG. 17-17, the acquisition character increase timing is set in 90AKS19. The acquisition character increase timing is the timing at which the display is updated so that the number of displayed character panel images serving as specific images increases in the acquisition performance. As shown in FIG. 17-13(B), when the number of character panel images displayed increases by changing from displaying panel preparation images to displaying character panel images, the display of effect images increases the number of character panel images displayed. In response to the game ball entering the second starting prize opening 14, it is possible to give the player the impression that the number of displayed character panel images has increased. On the other hand, the acquisition character increase timing is set in advance in 90AKS19 of the acquisition character determination process, and in the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12, when it is the acquisition character increase timing in 90AKS06, the acquisition character increase timing is An increase in the number of acquired characters can be notified. Therefore, the timing at which the number of character panel images displayed increases is not affected by whether or not a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 14.

The acquisition character increase timing may be set fixedly or variably, for example, so that the interval before and after is 0.5 seconds or more and 1.5 seconds or less. In control example 90AKE01, timings 90AKT01 to 90AKT05 are set as acquisition character increase timings in response to an increase in the number of character panel images displayed for the first to fifth character acquisitions. Then, the interval AKL1 from the start timing AKT02 of the acquisition performance to the timing 90AKT01 which is the first acquisition character increase timing, the interval AKL2 from timing 90AKT01 to the second acquisition character increase timing 90AKT02, and the interval AKL2 from timing 90AKT02 to the third acquisition character increase timing. Interval AKL3 from timing 90AKT03 which is the acquisition character increase timing; interval AKL4 from timing 90AKT03 to timing 90AKT04 which is the fourth acquisition character increase timing; interval AKL5 from timing 90AKT04 to timing 90AKT05 which is the fifth acquisition character increase timing. are set within a range of 0.5 seconds or more and 1.5 seconds or less. For example, the performance control CPU 101 may determine the acquisition character increase timing for each round by extracting numerical data serving as a random number for determining the acquisition character increase timing and referring to the acquisition character increase timing determination table. Alternatively, a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance for each number of acquired characters as timing patterns combining acquired character increase timings, and by selecting one of the timing patterns, the acquired character increase timing for each time may be determined. Each time the acquired character increase timing determined in this way is reached, the number of displayed character panel images serving as a specific image is sequentially increased, thereby preventing a decrease in interest due to monotonous display of specific images, and reducing the sense of discomfort. It becomes possible to create an appropriate display effect.

In the acquisition performance, the timing at which the number of displayed character panel images increases is the same timing for increasing the number of acquired characters, depending on whether the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 14 or not. On the other hand, in the acquisition performance, acquisition promotion notification is performed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the right toward the second starting winning hole 14. In the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, if there is a second start winning at 90AKS08, a winning notification effect is executed under the control of 90AKS09. For example, an increase promotion effect may be displayed to encourage an increase in the number of character panel images displayed. For example, the increase incitement effect display may be displayed from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9, corresponding to the placement position where the second starting prize opening 14 is provided in the right-handed route, which is the second route. It is sufficient to display an effect image showing how the effect is applied to the panel preparation image. Alternatively, the increasing effect display may be any effect display such as a flash display in which the entire screen of the effect display device 9 flashes or a blackout display in which the entire screen is blacked out. By executing such a winning notification performance, it is possible to give the player the impression that he/she is involved in increasing the number of acquired characters, and to encourage playing by firing game balls that are hit to the right.

The timing for increasing the number of acquired characters may be made different depending on whether the player is firing a right-handed game ball or not. For example, in the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12, when it is the acquisition character increase timing at 90AKS06, it is determined whether or not the firing of a right-handed game ball is detected. At this time, if detected, the number of displayed character panel images is increased at the determined acquisition character increase timing. On the other hand, if it is not detected, the timing for increasing the number of displayed character panel images may be delayed by changing the determined acquisition character increase timing to a timing obtained by adding a predetermined time such as one second.

FIG. 17-21 is a flowchart showing the small symbol change setting process (89AKS03) in the acquisition performance process (AKS104). The small symbol change setting process is executed in response to the case where there is a hit notice in 90AKS02 of the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12. If there is a winning notice, either the special state final variation or the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory becomes a winning variation, and the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol. In the small symbol change setting process, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether the winning variation is the special state final variation (89AKS31). If the winning variation is the final variation in the special state, there is no need to change the final small symbol to be the final stopped small symbol, so the process ends as is.

If the winning variation is not the special state final variation but one of the variation displays corresponding to the second pending memory, the final stop small symbol is confirmed (89AKS32). For example, the performance control CPU 101 may check the final stop small symbol by reading the storage data of the final stop small symbol determined in 89AKS11 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9. Among the final stop small symbols confirmed at this time, the medium symbol is changed to a special symbol indicating the letter V (89AKS33). In this way, if the final variation in the special state is not a winning variation but one of the variation displays corresponding to the second pending memory is a winning variation, the medium symbol in the confirmed small symbol corresponding to the current variation display is specially By changing the pattern, a special display result can be derived. In this case, setting is made to wait for winning to be held (89AKS34). For example, a hit pending standby flag provided in the RAM 103 may be set. After that, it is determined whether the left symbol and the right symbol are a combination of specific symbols in the determined small symbol (89AKS35). If it is not a combination of specific symbols, the process is terminated, thereby making it possible to derive the special display result configured by the change in 89AKS33. If it is a combination of specific symbols, the left symbol or the right symbol in the determined small symbol is changed to a small symbol other than the specific symbol (89AKS36), and then the process is ended. As a result, the determined small symbol different from the special symbol constituting the special display result includes a small symbol different from the specific symbol.

FIG. 17-22 is a flowchart showing the expectation level increasing effect processing (AKS106) in the final variation effect processing (89AKS02). In the expectation level up performance process, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is timing AKT03 at which the expectation level up performance can be started (91AKS11). The expectation level increasing effects shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 can be started at timing AKT03. If the timing is AKT03, it is determined whether the second pending storage number is the upper limit of 4 (91AKS12). At this time, if the second pending storage number is less than 4 but not 4, the expectation level increasing effect is prohibited (91AKS13). For example, by canceling the setting of the expectation level increasing performance period, the expectation level increasing performance process may be set not to be executed in the subsequent final fluctuation performance process. As a result, when the timing AKT03 at which the expectation level increasing effect can be started is reached, a range of cases in which the number of second pending memories has not reached the upper limit of 4 is determined, and the expectation level increasing effect as a change effect is performed. A limit is placed on not implementing it.

If the expectation level increasing performance is not performed, the acquisition performance may be continuously performed. If a second starting prize occurs while this acquisition performance is being executed, the number of character panel images displayed may be increased in the acquisition performance, or the acquisition performance may be ended and the execution of the expectation level increasing performance may be started. good. Alternatively, if the expectation level increasing performance is not performed, the acquisition performance may be ended without continuing. In this case, a performance different from the acquisition performance may be executed, or a standby state may be entered until execution of the preview performance is started.

When the timing AKT03 at which the expectation level increasing performance can be started is reached and the second pending memory number has reached the upper limit of 4, the following steps are taken to enable the execution of the expectation level increasing performance which is a change performance. Control takes place. For example, if the second pending storage number is 4 in 91AKS12, the target notice number is set to 1 (91AKS14). The target preview number in the expectation level increasing production process is, for example, the notice number that is the target of the decision regarding the expectation level increasing production among the preview numbers associated with the storage area of the final variation production data in the final variation production data storage unit AKM02. A number is specified. Note that even if the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit of 4, the expectation level increasing effect may not be performed at a predetermined rate. When the second pending memory number reaches the upper limit of 4, the expectation level increasing effect is executed at a high rate, such as 90%, and at a low rate, such as 10%. The close-up effect may not be executed.

Next, it is determined whether the target notice number is a winning notice number (91AKS15). The winning notice number can be determined by 90AKS01 of the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12. If it is a winning notification number, it is determined to increase the winning notification expectation level (91AKS16). The decision to increase the expectation level of a winning notice involves determining whether or not to change the display mode of the character panel image when the preview performance related to the character panel image that is a specific image is a winning notice that suggests a win, and changing the display mode of the character panel image. This includes determining the display mode after the change in the case where the display mode is changed. On the other hand, if it is not a winning notification number, it is determined to increase the expectation level of loss notification (91AKS17). The decision to increase the expectation level of a loss notice involves determining whether or not to change the display mode of the character panel image when the preview effect related to the character panel image that is a specific image is a loss notice that suggests a loss. This includes determining the display mode after the change in the case where the display mode is changed. The final variation effect data indicating the determination result by 91AKS16 or 91AKS17 may be stored in the storage area of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with the notice number that is the target notice number. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the decision to increase the expectation level of winning notice or the expectation level of losing notice is not to increase the expectation level, which does not change the display mode of the character panel image (91AKS18).

When the result of determining the expectation level is to increase the expectation level by changing the display mode of the character panel image, the expectation level increasing condition is determined (92AKS01). The expectation level increasing condition is a condition that must be met in order to change the display mode of the character panel image in the expectation level increasing effect. For example, the expectation level increasing condition can be selected from multiple types of conditions, such as the occurrence of the second starting prize, the end of the expectation level increasing performance, a specific timing during the expectation level increasing performance, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if it can be determined. The final variation effect data indicating the expectation level increasing condition determined at this time may be stored in the storage area of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with the notice number that is the target notice number. Then, it is determined whether the target notice number is the number of times the notice has been executed (91AKS19). If it is not the number of times the notice has been executed, the target notice number is increased by 1 (91AKS20). Thereafter, the process returns to 91AKS15 and successively determines whether to increase the expectation level of winning notice or the expectation level of losing notice. If it is the number of advance notice executions, control is performed to start a continuation promotion notification (91AKS21). For example, it is only necessary that the continuation promotion notification can be executed by displaying an effect image in a display mode corresponding to the continuation promotion notification at the notification display position on the screen of the effect display device 9. The continuation promotion notification may be performed by displaying the effect image and by outputting audio, lighting a lamp, moving a movable object, or a combination of some or all of these.

If the timing is not AKT03 in 91AKS11, it is determined whether or not there is a second starting prize (91AKS22). For example, when the second starting winning designation command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, it may be determined that there is a second starting winning. The second starting winning designation command is used for performance control when the second starting opening switch 14a is in the ON state, even if the second pending memory number has reached the upper limit in the starting opening switch passing process (S311). It is sufficient if it can be transmitted to the microcomputer 100. If there is a second starting prize, it is determined whether or not the expectation level cannot be increased (91AKS23). For example, if the occurrence of the second starting prize is not included in the expectation level increasing conditions, or if the expectation level has already been increased, it may be determined that the expectation level cannot be increased. If the expectation level cannot be increased, control is performed to execute an inciting effect (91AKS24). For example, an inciting effect display may be performed to incite the change in the display mode of the character panel image. The inciting effect display is, for example, one of the characters from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9, corresponding to the placement position where the second starting prize opening 14 is provided in the right-handed route which is the second route. It is sufficient to display an effect image showing how the effect is applied to the panel image. Alternatively, the inciting effect display may be any effect display such as a flash display in which the entire screen of the effect display device 9 flashes or a blackout display in which the entire screen is blacked out.

If there is no second starting prize in 91AKS22, it is determined whether another expectation level increasing condition is satisfied (91AKS25). When it is possible to increase the expectation level in 91AKS23 or when other expectation level increase conditions are satisfied in 91AKS25, control is performed to execute expectation level increase notification (91AKS26). At this time, the expectation level increase condition has been established, so for example, if the display mode of the character panel image corresponding to the preview number is changed according to the expectation level increase setting indicated by the storage data of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02. good. Furthermore, a change effect display may be performed to notify that the display mode of the character panel image has changed. The effect display at the time of change is similar to the effect display at the time of increase in the acquisition performance, the display of a first effect image added around the character panel image whose display mode has changed, and the display of a second effect image different from the first effect image. It may also include a display of. The second effect image is displayed in a display manner from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9, for example, corresponding to the arrangement position where the second starting prize opening 14 is provided in the right-handed route which is the second route. Any effect image may be used as long as it shows how the effect is applied to the changed character panel image. By displaying such an effect image, it is possible to give the player the impression that the display mode of the character panel image has changed in response to the game ball entering the second starting prize opening 14. However, in reality, the display mode of the character panel image may be changed due to the satisfaction of an expectation level increase condition different from the occurrence of the second starting prize. Therefore, in the expectation level increasing production, whether a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 14 or not, if the preset expectation level increasing condition is satisfied, the display mode of the character panel image that becomes a specific image will be changed. It would be good if we could change it. On the other hand, in the expectation level increasing production, whether the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 14 or not, if the preset expectation level increasing condition is not satisfied, the character panel image becomes a specific image. does not change the display mode.

Subsequently, it is determined whether it is the timing AKT04 to end the expectation level increasing performance (91AKS27). The execution of the expectation level increasing effects shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 ends at timing AKT04. If the timing is not AKT04, the process ends. If the timing is AKT04, control is performed to end the continuation promotion notification (91AKS28). It also performs control to end the timer update display (91AKS29) and ends the process.

FIG. 17-23 shows a display example when the expectation level increasing effect is executed. FIG. 17-23(A) shows a display example 91AK01 when the expectation level increasing effect is started. When the expectation level increasing effect is executed, five character panel images are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at five panel display positions 90AKA1 to 90AKA5, and a continuation promotion notification is displayed at the notification display position 91AKB1. The image is displayed. The expectation level increasing effect becomes executable when the second pending memory number is the upper limit of 4, and is restricted from being executed when the second pending memory number is less than 4. If the second pending memory number is 4, the number of character panel images displayed in the acquisition performance will be 5, corresponding to the number of acquired characters being 5, and 5 character panel images will be displayed. . The continuation promotion notification image is a performance image for promoting the firing of the game ball aiming at the second starting prize opening 14, continuing from the acquisition performance during execution of the expectation level increasing performance. The continuation promotion notification image is displayed together with the right-handed hitting promotion notification image in the right-handed hitting display area 9Z, thereby promoting the hitting of the game ball into the right-handed hitting path, which is the second path in which the second starting prize opening 14 is provided. You may also encourage right-handed hitting. In the display example 91AK01, a continuation promotion notification image including a character image indicating the message "Still aim!" is displayed at the notification display position 91AKB1.

If the expectation level increasing condition includes the occurrence of a second starting winning, the expectation level increasing condition is satisfied when the second starting winning as shown in FIG. 17-23(B) occurs. FIG. 17-23(C) is a display example 91AK02 when the expectation level increasing condition is satisfied in the expectation level increasing effect. In the expectation level increasing effect shown in FIG. 17-22, when there is a second starting prize in 91AKS22 and it is possible to increase the expectation level in 91AKS23, the expectation level increase is notified by control of 91AKS26. In display example 91AK02, in the fifth character panel image, the display color of the panel frame portion image changes from white to gold, thereby changing the display mode of the character panel image. At this time, the change effect display described in connection with 91AKS26 of the expectation level increasing production process may be performed. In this way, in the expectation-up effect, the effect image is displayed to give the player the impression that he or she is involved in the change of the character panel image, and it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by firing a right-handed game ball.

FIG. 17-24(A) shows a determination example 91AKD11 for increasing the expectation level of winning notice. In the expectation level up production process shown in FIG. 17-22, the winning notice expectation level up is determined in 91AKS16. In determination example 91AKD11, the presence or absence of an increase in expectation level and the display color that is the display mode after the change are determined at a determination rate according to the character indicated by the character panel image of the target preview number. For example, if the character shown in the character panel image is the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, it is determined with a 40% determination rate without increasing the expectation level, and a 50% determination rate is expected to change the color to red. It is decided to increase the degree of expectation, and it is determined to increase the degree of expectation that it will change to gold with a 10% determination rate. In addition, if the character shown in the character panel image is any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, it will be determined with a 20% determination rate without increasing the expectation level, and a red color will be determined with a 60% determination rate. It is decided to increase the expectation level to change it to gold, and it is decided to increase the expectation level to change it to gold with a determination rate of 20%.

In this way, in determination example 91AKD11, the winning result is determined depending on whether the character shown in the character panel image is the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, or when the character shown in the character panel image is any one of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5. The decision rate for increasing the prediction expectation level is different. Specifically, in the case of any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the display color is changed at a higher rate than in the case of the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2 to increase the expectation of winning. up. Therefore, the rate at which the display mode of the character panel image is changed differs depending on the type of character in the character panel image. This makes it possible to create an appropriate display performance that increases the player's attention level by varying the expectations of the change in the display mode of the character panel image.

FIG. 17-24(B) shows a decision example 91AKD12 for increasing the expectation level of failure notice. In the expectation level up effect processing shown in FIG. 17-22, the failure notice expectation level up is determined in 91AKS17. In determination example 91AKD12, the presence or absence of an increase in expectation level and the display color that is the display mode after the change are determined at a determination rate according to the character indicated by the character panel image of the target preview number. For example, if the character shown in the character panel image is the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, it is determined with a determination rate of 85% without increasing the expectation level, and with a determination rate of 13%, the character is expected to change to red. It was decided to increase the degree of expectation, and it was decided to increase the degree of expectation that it would change to gold with a 2% determination rate. In addition, if the character shown in the character panel image is any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, it will be determined with a 90% determination rate without increasing the expectation level, and with a 9% determination rate it will be red. It is decided to increase the expectation level to change it to gold, and it is decided to increase the expectation level to change it to gold with a 1% determination rate.

In this way, in decision example 91AKD12, there is a difference between the case where the character shown in the character panel image is the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, and the case where the character shown in the character panel image is any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5. The decision rate for increasing the prediction expectation level is different. Specifically, in the case of any one of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the expectation level does not increase at a higher rate than in the case of the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2. Therefore, the rate at which the display mode of the character panel image is changed differs depending on the type of character in the character panel image. In addition, in the case of the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, the display mode is more likely to change due to an increase in the expectation of a loss notice rather than an increase in the expectation of a win notice, whereas from the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 In any of the above cases, the display mode is more likely to change due to an increase in the expectation level of a win notice rather than an increase in the expectation level of a loss notice. As a result, the degree of expectation of winning when the display mode of the character panel image changes is made different depending on the character shown in the character panel image, thereby making it possible to perform an appropriate display performance that makes the expectation of the player different.

FIG. 17-25 shows a setting example 92AK01 of the expectation level increase condition. In the expectation level increasing effect processing shown in FIG. 17-22, when the expectation level is increased in 91AKS18, the expectation level increasing condition is determined in 92AKS01. In the setting example 92AK01, the expectation level increasing condition that changes the display mode of the character panel image in the expectation level increasing production is prepared so that it can be selected from multiple types of expectation level increasing conditions such as the expectation level increasing conditions 92AKC01 to 92AKC03. ing. The respective expectation level increasing conditions may be partially or completely different from each other for a plurality of conditions such as second start prize winning, forced up timing during performance, and performance end timing. The second starting winning is a condition that can be satisfied when the second starting winning occurs. The forced up timing during performance is a condition that can be satisfied when the forced up timing provided during execution of the expectation level up performance is reached. The performance end timing is a condition that can be satisfied when the expectation level increasing performance ends.

The expectation level increasing conditions 92AKC01 to 92AKC03 are all set so that they can be satisfied when the second start winning occurs. Therefore, no matter which expectation level increasing condition is determined, if the second start winning occurs, the display mode of the character panel image serving as the specific image can be changed. On the other hand, the expectation level increase condition 92AKC01 includes a combination of conditions such as there is a forced up timing during the performance and there is no timing to end the performance. The expectation level increase condition 92AKC02 includes a combination of conditions such as no forced up timing during the performance and a performance end timing. The expectation level increase condition 92AKC03 includes a combination of conditions such as no forced up timing during performance and no performance end timing.

In this manner, in the setting example 92AK01, when the expectation level increasing condition 92AKC01 is determined, the display mode of the character panel image can be changed by the forced timing during the performance in the expectation level increasing performance. In addition, when the expectation level increasing condition 92AKC02 is determined, in the expectation level increasing effect, when the game ball passes through the second starting prize opening 14, the display mode of the character panel image is changed, and the second starting winning opening When the game ball does not pass through 14, the display mode of the character panel image can be changed when the expectation level increasing effect ends. If the expectation level increase condition 92AKC03 is determined, the display mode of the character panel image can be changed when the game ball passes through the second start prize opening 14 in the expectation level increase effect, but the second start When the game ball does not pass through the winning hole 14, the display mode of the character panel image is not changed and the expectation level is not increased in the expectation level increasing performance.

Instead of the expectation level increasing condition 92AKC01, or together with the expectation level increasing condition 92AKC01, a case may be provided in which the occurrence of the second starting winning is not included in the conditions. In this case, even when the game ball passes through the second starting prize opening 14 in the expectation level up performance, the display mode of the character panel image is not changed at this point, and the character panel image is displayed at the forced up timing during the performance. This will change the display mode. In this way, when the condition of forced up timing during the performance is included, the display mode of the character panel image will be changed regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the second starting prize opening 14 in the expectation level increase performance. can be changed, and the change timing can be arbitrarily set.

In the expectation level increasing effect, the character shown in the character partial image may be changed. In 91AKS16 and 91AKS17 of the expectation level increasing production process shown in FIG. 17-22, the character shown in the character panel image being displayed is specified according to the target preview number, and the character is changed based on the identification result. The determination of whether or not the character is changed and the determination of the changed character in the case of change may be performed. At this time, the character after the change may be determined so as to be a character that has a higher probability of winning or a higher advantage of the special state than the character shown in the character panel image being displayed. This makes it possible to provide an appropriate display performance that increases the sense of anticipation when the display mode of the character panel image changes and increases the player's attention level.

FIG. 17-26 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect processing (AKS108) in the final variation effect processing (89AKS02). In the preview performance process, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is timing AKT11 at which the first preview performance can be started (AKS301). The first execution of the preview effects shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 can be started at timing AKT11. If the timing is AKT11, the target notice number is set to 1 (AKS302). For example, the target preview number in the preview performance process is specified by the preview number of the preview performance to be executed among the preview numbers associated with the storage area of the final variable performance data in the final variation performance data storage unit AKM02. Ru.

Next, a preview performance control pattern is selected (AKS303). The preview performance control pattern is configured to include control data for controlling the execution of the preview performance, and a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance in accordance with the presentation mode of the preview performance. Thereafter, control is performed to start the preview performance (AKS304). This makes it possible to start execution of a preview performance related to the character panel image that is the specific image displayed in the acquisition performance or expectation level increasing performance.

If the timing is not AKT11 in AKS301, it is determined whether or not to end the current preview performance (AKS305). For example, based on the control data read from the preview performance control pattern, if the end of the current preview performance is specified, it may be determined that the current preview performance is to be ended. If the current preview performance is not to be ended, the process is ended. On the other hand, when ending the current preview performance, the target preview number is increased by 1 (AKS306). Thereafter, it is determined whether there is a next notice (AKS307). For example, in the final variation performance data storage unit AKM02, if the final variation performance data for executing the preview performance is stored in the storage area associated with the preview number that is the target preview number, it is determined that there is a next preview. However, if such final variation effect data is not stored, it may be determined that there will be no next notice. If there is a next notice, the process is returned to the AKS 303 and execution of a notice performance corresponding to the target notice number is started.

If there is no next notice in AKS307, control is performed to end the notice performance (AKS308). At this time, control may be performed to start execution of the loss response performance among the display result corresponding performances when only a loss notice that suggests a loss is executed as the preview performance. On the other hand, when a winning preview suggesting a win is executed as a preview performance, control may be performed to start execution of the winning performance among the display result corresponding performances. It is only necessary that a specific notification for notifying that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state or a small win game state is made possible by executing the loss handling performance. It is only necessary that a specific notification for notifying that the execution of the winning corresponding performance will be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state can be made.

After AKS308, control is performed to stop and display the small symbols (89AKS71). For example, when the special state final variation is a loss, the determined small symbol determined as the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. Further, when the special state final variation is a hit, a temporarily stopped small symbol using a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. The temporary stop small symbol using the special symbol is determined by 89AKS20 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9. In this way, when controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state based on the variable display that is the final variation of the special state, the special display result is configured during the variable display in the variable display. A temporary stop small pattern using a special pattern is temporarily stopped. In this case, after the preview performance ends, a specific announcement is made to notify that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state or a small win game state by a win corresponding performance included in the display result corresponding performance. After execution, the determined small symbol of the winning combination may be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the small symbols. By temporarily stopping these temporary stop small symbols and then stopping and displaying the confirmed winning combination small symbols, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which variation display will control the advantageous state based on the final variation. To make it possible to perform appropriate display performance that increases the player's attention to various performances included in the performance and improves the interest in the game.

In 89AKS20 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9, a temporary stop small symbol that does not use a special symbol may be determined. In this case, under the control of the 89AKS71, a temporarily stopped small symbol that does not use a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 9K in response to the end of the preview presentation. In this case, after the preview performance ends, in response to the end of the variable display corresponding to the final variation of the special state, the confirmed small symbol of the winning combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the small symbol. That's fine. By temporarily stopping the temporary stop small symbols that do not use special symbols, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing at an early stage that the control will be in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Appropriate display performance that maintains a sense of expectation regarding the state becomes possible.

If the special state final variation and the variation displays corresponding to the second pending memory are all losers, a loser notice that suggests a loser is executed in all preview performances. In this case, under the control of 89AKS71, the determined small symbol of the losing combination determined as the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 9K in response to the last notice performance. In this way, when a loss notice that suggests a loss is executed in all preview presentations, the confirmed small symbols of the losing combination are stopped and displayed, giving the player the impression that the variable display is highly linked to the notice presentation. This makes it possible to provide an appropriate display performance that increases the player's interest in the preview performance and variable display.

In 90AKS01 of the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12, a winning notification number is determined in accordance with the fluctuation display that will result in winning fluctuation. As a result, the final variation of the special state becomes a winning variation and is controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state, or one of the fluctuation displays for the second reservation memory becomes a winning variation and becomes a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. In the case of being controlled to an advantageous state such as a gaming state, it is possible to suggest that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state by executing a winning notice that suggests a win by any of a plurality of notice presentations.

In 90AKS03 of the acquisition performance process shown in FIG. 17-12, the number of times of execution of the notice at the time of loss is determined. As a result, the final variation of the special state is not a winning variation, but is not controlled to be an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state, and the display of the variation in the second pending memory is not a winning variation, but when no specific pending information is stored. By executing a loss notice that indicates a loss through all of the multiple preview presentations, it becomes possible to suggest that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state.

FIG. 17-27 shows a configuration example AKY01 of the preview performance control pattern. In the preview performance process shown in FIG. 17-26, a preview performance control pattern to be used corresponding to the current preview performance is selected from among a plurality of preview performance control patterns prepared in the AKS 303. In the configuration example AKY01, selection is possible according to the notice number indicated by the target notice number, the character indicated by the final variation effect data stored in the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with this notice number, and the contents of the notice. A plurality of patterns are prepared in advance as advance notice performance control patterns. For example, one of the preview performance control patterns CPA1-1 to CPA1-5 can be selected depending on the character shown in the character panel image when the preview number is 1 and the preview content is a hit suggestion. Any one of the preview performance control patterns CPA2-1 to CPA2-5 can be selected depending on the character shown in the character panel image when the preview number is 2 and the preview content is a hit suggestion. Any one of the preview performance control patterns CPA3-1 to CPA3-5 can be selected depending on the character shown in the character panel image when the preview number is 3 and the preview content is a hit suggestion. Any of the preview performance control patterns CPA4-1 to CPA4-5 can be selected depending on the character shown in the character panel image when the preview number is 4 and the preview content is a hit suggestion. Any one of the preview performance control patterns CPA5-1 to CPA5-5 can be selected depending on the character shown in the character panel image when the preview number is 5 and the preview content is a hit suggestion. Moreover, any one of the preview performance control patterns CPB1-1 to CPB1-5 can be selected depending on the character shown in the character panel image when the preview number is 1 and the preview content suggests a loss. Any of the preview performance control patterns CPB2-1 to CPB2-5 can be selected depending on the character shown in the character panel image when the preview number is 2 and the preview content suggests a loss. Any one of the preview performance control patterns CPB3-1 to CPB3-5 can be selected depending on the character shown in the character panel image when the preview number is 3 and the preview content suggests a loss. Any one of the preview performance control patterns CPB4-1 to CPB4-5 can be selected depending on the character shown in the character panel image when the preview number is 4 and the preview content suggests a loss. Any one of the preview performance control patterns CPB5-1 to CPB5-5 can be selected depending on the character shown in the character panel image when the preview number is 5 and the preview content suggests a loss.

In this way, in the configuration example AKY01, the preview number corresponding to the number of executions of the preview performance, the character shown in the character panel image that becomes an ally character in the preview performance, and whether the preview performance suggests a win or a loss. By selecting a preview performance control pattern according to the preview performance, it becomes possible to execute preview performances with different performance modes. In addition, by selecting a preview performance control pattern corresponding to the character shown in the character panel image and controlling the execution of the preview performance, the character shown in the character panel image can be used as an ally character in the battle performance in the preview performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a preview performance of the performance mode related to the character panel image serving as the specific image. Note that the preview effect control pattern is not limited to the preview effect control pattern in the configuration example AKY01, and any advance notice effect control pattern may be used so that a preview effect related to the character panel image that is a specific image can be executed.

If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit of 4 when the execution of the preview effect is started, the promotion notification at the time of advance notice may be executed. The promotional notification at the time of advance notice may be in the same notification form as the acquisition promotion notification or the continuation promotion notification, or may be in a different notification form from these. When timing AKT11 is reached in AKS301 of the advance notice performance process shown in FIG. 17-26, it is determined whether or not the second pending storage number is the upper limit value. If the upper limit is not reached, it is only necessary to execute the promotional notification at the time of advance notice by displaying an effect image, outputting audio, lighting a lamp, moving a movable object, or a combination of some or all of these.

FIGS. 17-28 and 17-29 show display examples after the expectation level increasing effect is completed. When the expectation level increasing effect is completed, the display of the effect image showing the enemy character is started, as shown in the display example AK101 shown in FIG. 17-28(A). In the display example AK101, the character panel image displayed in the acquisition effect or the expectation level increasing effect is displayed in a reduced size at a predetermined position on the screen, such as the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9. Next, in the display example AK102 shown in FIG. 17-28(B), the first preview effect is started in response to timing AKT11. At this time, the display of the character panel image related to the current preview performance, such as the character panel image displayed on the leftmost side among the plurality of character panel images, is erased. Along with this, the battle performance of the preview performance in which the character shown in the erased character panel image becomes an ally character starts to proceed. When a preview performance is executed, each time a player's action such as pressing the push button 120 is detected, the display of the character panel image is erased and the corresponding preview performance is displayed. A battle performance may proceed. These display controls allow the player to recognize that a preview effect related to the character panel image will be executed. In the display example AK103 shown in FIG. 17-28(C), a scene in which an ally character is defeated is displayed, thereby executing a notice of loss that suggests a loss.

Thereafter, in the second to fourth preview performances, the battle performance of the preview performance proceeds in which the characters shown in the sequentially erased character panel images become ally characters. In the series of display examples shown in FIGS. 17-28, in each of the first to fourth preview presentations, a scene in which an ally character is defeated is displayed, thereby executing a loss notice that suggests a loss. Subsequently, in the display example AK104 shown in FIG. 17-28(D), the fifth preview performance is started in response to timing AKT15. At this time as well, the battle performance of the preview performance in which the character shown in the erased character panel image becomes an ally character starts to proceed. Then, in the display example AK105 shown in FIG. 17-28(E), a win preview that suggests a win is executed by displaying a scene in which an ally character wins. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final small symbol changed in 89AKS33 or 89AKS36 of the small symbol change setting process shown in FIG. 17-21 is stopped and displayed.

Following the execution of the winning notice, a winning corresponding performance is started in the display example AK106 shown in FIG. 17-28(F). In the win response display, even after the final variation of the special state ends, the playback display of the moving image or the animation display of the still image in the display of the background image continues to be executed. For example, in the display example AK107 shown in FIG. 17-28(G), the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 9K corresponds to the variable display of the pending number 1 in the second pending memory at the end of the special state. Begins. At this time, the playback display of the moving image in the win correspondence display, etc., continues to be executed. In the display example AK108 shown in FIG. 17-28(H), the final small symbol to be stopped is stopped and displayed in response to the end of the variable display. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final small symbol changed in 89AKS16 and 89AKS18 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9 is stopped and displayed.

In the display example AK109 shown in FIG. 17-28(I), the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 9K is started in response to the variable display of the pending number 2 in the second pending memory at the end of the special state. Ru. At this time, the playback display of the moving image in the win correspondence display, etc., continues to be executed. In the display example AK110 shown in FIG. 17-28(J), the final small symbol to be stopped is stopped and displayed in response to the end of the variable display. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final small symbol changed in 89AKS16 and 89AKS18 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9 is stopped and displayed.

In the display example AK111 shown in FIG. 17-29(A), the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 9K is started in response to the variable display of the pending number 3 in the second pending memory at the end of the special state. Ru. At this time, the playback display of the moving image in the win correspondence display, etc., continues to be executed. In the display example AK112 shown in FIG. 17-29(B), in response to the end of the variable display, the final small symbol to be stopped is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final small symbol changed in 89AKS16 and 89AKS18 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9 is stopped and displayed. In the display example AK113 shown in FIG. 17-29(C), the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 9K is started in response to the variable display of the pending number 4 in the second pending memory at the end of the special state. Ru. At this time, the variable display result is determined to be one of the variable patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 in response to a "win". Further, in 89AKS53 of the effect pattern variation start setting process shown in FIG. 17-7, it is determined that the variation pattern is not PD1-1, and in 89AKS54, it is determined that the effect pattern is not displayed, The display of the effect pattern returns to the normal display state by the setting. Note that when the special state final variation is started, the display of the effect symbols is set to a non-display state by the setting of 89AKS52, so that the effect symbols are not displayed. As a result, in the display example AK113, variable display of the effect symbols is performed. After that, in the display example AK114 shown in FIG. 17-29(D), the final stop symbol and the final stop symbol are stopped and displayed in response to the end of the variable display. In this way, in the variable display based on the specific pending information, it is possible to notify that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state, in a manner different from the specific notification by the hit corresponding production, such as the display result of the production symbol. It is. In addition, it is not limited to the display result of the performance design, but may be caused by the display of a performance image different from the performance image in the performance design or hit-responsive performance, audio output, lamp lighting, movable object movement, or a combination of some or all of these. It suffices if it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state in any manner different from the advance notice performance or the winning performance.

When a plurality of preview performances are executed, the small symbols can be stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 9K so that the variable display mode changes to the reach mode each time each preview production is executed. good. For example, in display examples AK101 and AK102, the small symbols having the same graphic number as the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped in the small symbol display area 9K. In the display example AK104 as well, the small symbols having the same symbol number as the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped in the small symbol display area 9K. In the display example AK103, the small symbols that have been temporarily stopped may be changed again in response to the end of the preview presentation. In this way, by giving the player the impression that the player is in a reach mode every time the preview performance is executed, it becomes possible to provide an appropriate display performance that increases the player's expectations for the preview performance and improves the interest in the game. .

In the performance symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 17-7, when it is the special state final variation in 89AKS51, the production symbol becomes a non-display state in which the production symbol is not displayed due to the setting of 89AKS52. During the execution of the variable display that becomes the final change in the special state, there will be display results corresponding to the acquisition effect included in the final change effect, an expectation-up effect, one or more preview effects, a loss response effect or a win response effect, etc. , various performances are performed. In this case, by setting the performance symbols to a non-display state, the various performances included in the final variation performance can be easily recognized by the player, and an appropriate display performance that increases the player's attention to the performance can be created. It becomes possible. Thereafter, the non-display state of the performance symbols continues until it is determined in 89AKS53 of the performance symbol variation start process that the variation pattern is not PD1-1. Therefore, after the final variation performance including a preview performance that is a winning notice that suggests a win is executed, if the variation display is a loss based on pending information different from the specific pending information, the performance symbols will be hidden. As a result, small patterns are displayed variably. Then, if the variable display is a hit based on the specific pending information, one of the variable patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2, which is different from the variable pattern PD1-1, is determined, so the production symbols are returned to the normal display state. At the same time, small patterns are displayed variably. As a result, the variable display result can be easily recognized by the player as a variable display corresponding to a "win", and it is possible to reliably notify the player that the variable display result will be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Appropriate display performance becomes possible.

In the small symbol change setting process shown in FIG. 17-21, the medium symbol may not be changed to a special symbol by 89AKS33. In this case, even if the specific pending information is included in the pending information that becomes the second pending memory at the end of the special state, in the variable display corresponding to the final change of the special state, a fixed small number of losing combinations that do not use special symbols will be displayed. The pattern will be stopped and displayed. After that, in the variable display based on the specific pending information, it is possible to notify that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state or a small win game state in a manner different from the specific notification by the hit corresponding performance, such as the display result of the performance symbol. It is. In this way, even if specific pending information is stored, by deriving a display result that does not use special symbols in the final variation of the special state, it is possible to be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. To prevent a player from recognizing the situation at an early stage, and to provide an appropriate display effect that maintains a sense of expectation for an advantageous state.

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

Various effects included in the final variation effect may be performed in place of cases where they are executable in response to the final variation of the special state, or in addition to cases where they are executable in response to the final variation of the special state, or variations that are different from the final variation of the special state. It may be possible to execute it depending on the display. For example, in the normal state, if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 may be in the open state during a relatively long opening change period, making it easier for the second starting prize to occur. You can. When the number of second pending memories reaches a specific value due to the occurrence of such a second starting prize, the special variable display will be executed, and various effects similar to those included in the final variable effect will become executable. You can. Performances similar to various performances included in the final variation performance may be made possible by using not only the suspension information that becomes the second suspension memory but also the suspension information that becomes the first suspension memory.

In addition, in the normal state, a predetermined reach effect is executed as a specific reach effect, the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol, and when a jackpot occurs, the temporary stop small symbol using the special small symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be displayed and then varied again to derive a determined small symbol of a winning combination. For example, in 89AKS19 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9, if a variation pattern other than PC3-3 is a variation pattern with a specific reach effect that can be selected in the normal state, the process is changed to 89AKS20. It is only necessary to proceed and determine a temporary stop small symbol using a special symbol. In this way, by temporarily stopping a small symbol that becomes a special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol, and it may be possible to suggest that a jackpot will occur.

In the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-19, when the variation pattern is PC3-3 in 89AKS19, the temporary stop small symbol using a special symbol is determined in 89AKS20 regardless of the hit type. . On the other hand, when the winning type is a specific type, the small symbol using the special symbol may not be temporarily stopped and displayed. For example, if the hit type is the second special symbol jackpot, the small symbol that is temporarily stopped is not determined by 89AKS20, the small symbol that uses the special symbol is not temporarily stopped, and the determined small symbol of the winning combination is displayed. It may also be derived. When the hit type is the second special symbol jackpot, whether or not to temporarily stop display the small symbol using the special symbol in the case of the variable pattern PC3-3 and in the case of a variable pattern other than PC3-3. may be different. In addition, depending on the combination of the winning type and fluctuation pattern, or whether a condition different from the combination of the winning type and fluctuation pattern is satisfied, whether or not to display a small symbol using a special symbol is changed. Good too.

In 90AKS01 of the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, even if there is a fluctuating display that indicates a win, a win may be determined without any advance notice without executing a notice of a win that suggests a win. good. In this case, after a preview performance of a loss notice that suggests a loss is executed, a revival performance may be executed to suggest or notify that a jackpot or a small win will occur.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured such that the winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability and ball payout rate may be changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the setting value has 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot or small win decreases. Become. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning a jackpot or small win changes depending on the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change depending on the setting value. While the probability of winning a jackpot or a small win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. While the probability of winning a small hit is constant regardless of the setting value, the probability of winning a jackpot may change depending on the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 31 side to the performance control board 80 side.

During execution of the variable display, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate. For example, the performance symbol variation start process of the performance control process includes a stop symbol determination process. The stop symbol determination process may be any process that can determine the combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of performance symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of performance symbols. In the stop symbol determination process, when the super reach effect is executed, it may be determined that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate based on which of the ready-to-reach symbols has been determined. The reach symbols are the same performance symbols in which the left symbol and the right symbol coincide and are stopped and displayed among the final stop symbols at the time of a reach loss and the final stop symbols at the time of a jackpot.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the determined ready-to-reach symbol is a performance symbol corresponding to the number 7, it may be determined whether or not there is a setting suggestion performance. If the setting suggestion effect is to be executed or not, it is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table prepared in advance based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. good. The setting suggestion performance can be executed in different manners depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the symbol display color is not changed. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1, it is only necessary that the symbol display color can be changed at a predetermined rate. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is changed as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a production symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed. Depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine, whether or not the symbol display color is changed to a specific color differs as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a production symbol corresponding to the number 7. Good too.

The setting suggestion effect is instead of changing the symbol display color that is the display color of the production symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, or in addition to changing the symbol display color that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol. Any aspect of the ready-to-reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the effect pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, it may change the presentation mode of any presentation device, such as the display of a background image, outer frame image, or any other presentation image, audio output, lamp lighting, movable object movement, or a combination of some or all of these. It's okay. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed using arbitrary data related to effect control, arbitrary data not related to effect control, or data that is a combination of these, predetermined for execution of the effect. It only needs to be executable when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied.

In addition to effects that can change the display color of the ready-to-reach symbols, setting suggestion effects include arbitrary effects, such as pseudo-continuation effects and look-ahead preview effects, to suggest the degree of expectation of winning, as well as information regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may also be possible to make suggestions. During execution of the variable display, a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. When executing an arbitrary performance, there are cases in which suggestions regarding control of the jackpot gaming state and small winning gaming state are made, and then there are cases in which suggestions regarding control of the jackpot gaming state and small winning gaming state are continuously made, and cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state and small winning gaming state are continuously given. It may include a case in which suggestions regarding the control of the small winning gaming state are continuously made and suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made. When executing any performance, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, the suggestion may end, or if the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state is continued. It may also include a case where a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is given at the same time as the above.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by giving a suggestion based on the effect mode of the pattern that is determined at a high rate. It is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest in the game.

While the variable display is being performed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state and the small winning gaming state may be made, but suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot or a small win, a winning start effect (fanfare effect) or a winning effect (a small win effect, a effect corresponding to the first round or the second round, etc.) is executed. Accordingly, suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made. Suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made without making any suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state It may also provide suggestions regarding control of conditions that are advantageous for players different from the above. For example, a suggestion regarding a special state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state may be provided. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

Various restrictions may be set to arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives to be achieved, the problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that varies the presence, proportion, or other amount of processing, control, or execution of an action; Any content that can be changed (for example, whether to stop or reduce, the extent of reduction, etc.) is sufficient.

(Explanation regarding problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 89AK)
A gaming machine that displays identification information in a variable manner and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a reservation storage means that can store information regarding the variable display as reservation information, and whether or not it is controlled to be in an advantageous state. The specific notification execution means is equipped with a specific notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification that notifies the user of specific In the variable display, specific notification can be executed in relation to the specific variable display and the variable display corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension storage means when the specific variable display is executed, and For notifying that the specific variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state when the specific suspension information regarding the variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display is not stored in the suspension storage means. A predetermined display result can be derived as a display result of the reduced identification information in a variable display based on suspension information stored in the suspension storage means after the specific notification is executed and the specific variable display is completed, and a predetermined display result can be derived as a display result of the reduced identification information, and When the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to an advantageous state, a specific notification is executed to notify that the specific variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state, and after the specific variable display ends. As a display result of the reduced identification information in the variable display based on the holding information different from the specific holding information stored in the holding storage means of It is possible to derive a special display result composed of special identification information that is not included in the identification information, and it is possible to notify in a manner different from the specific notification that the variable display based on the specific pending information is controlled to be in an advantageous state. The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, and when controlled to the second advantageous state, the display result of the identification information As a result, a specific display result composed only of specific identification information is derived, and the reduced identification information different from the special identification information constituting the special display result includes predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information. Here, the identification information may be, for example, a production pattern. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pending storage means may be, for example, a second pending storage buffer. The specific notification may be, for example, a preview effect, a display result corresponding effect, or the like. The specific notification execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the preview performance process in step AKS108 and the display result corresponding performance process in step AKS110. The reduced identification information may be, for example, a small pattern. The variable reduction display means may be, for example, the small pattern display area 9K of the effect display device 9. The predetermined display result may be, for example, the final stopped symbol of a losing combination. The special display result may be a final stop symbol using a special symbol representing the letter V, for example. The first advantageous state may be the case of the first special jackpot C, for example. The second advantageous state may be any one of the first special figure jackpot A, the first special figure jackpot B, the second special figure jackpot, and the jackpots X to Z via a small hit, for example. The specific identification information may be, for example, a red 7 effect pattern and a small pattern, a gold 7 effect pattern and a small pattern, or the like.
According to such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

When controlled to be in an advantageous state based on a specific variable display, the special display result is temporarily stopped in the specific variable display, and after executing a specific notification to notify that the control is in an advantageous state, the specific display result is displayed. It may be possible to derive . For example, it may be necessary to execute steps 89AKS19 and 89AKS20.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

The special display result may be able to derive different types of display results depending on whether it is derived in the specific variable display or in the variable display after the specific variable display has ended. For example, when determining the final stop symbol in step AKS011, if the variation pattern is PC1-3, it is determined to be a reach-loss combination, if the variation pattern is PD1-1, it is determined to be a non-reach combination, and then in step 89AKS11, the final stop symbol is determined. It is only necessary to execute steps 89AKS16 to 89AKS18 or steps 89AKS32 to 89AKS35 after determining the small symbol.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

A starting winning means that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which the game medium passes through the starting area more easily than the first state, and a starting winning means that is controllable to a special state that makes it easier to change to the second state. Special state control means and special state terminating means for terminating the special state based on the number of executions of the variable display in the special state, the specific variable display is executed as the final variable display in the special state, and the specific variable display is executed as the final variable display in the special state. When the specific hold information is not stored in the hold storage means without being controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the variable display of A predetermined display result is derived as a display result of the reduced identification information in the variable display based on the pending information stored in the means, and when the control is performed in an advantageous state based on the last variable display, in the last variable display. When a specific result is derived and specific pending information is stored in a pending storage means without being controlled to an advantageous state based on the final variable display, it is notified that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state in the final variable display. A special display result is derived as a display result of the reduced identification information in a variable display based on suspension information different from the specific suspension information stored in the suspension storage means, and a variable display based on the specific suspension information is performed. A specific display result may be derived in . Here, the first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. Deriving the display result of the normal mode different from the ready-to-reach mode may be done if, for example, when determining the final stop symbol in step AKS011, the variable pattern PC1-3 is also determined to be a non-reachable combination. Deriving a display result in a specific manner in the final variable display is possible, for example, when determining the final stop symbol in step AKS011, when determining a jackpot combination in correspondence with the variable pattern PC3-3. good.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

When specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific variable display, after executing a specific effect that suggests that the specific variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state, the suspension storage Reduced identification information is variably displayed with identification information in a hidden state in a variable display based on suspension information different from specific suspension information stored in the means, and reduced identification information is reduced in a normal display state in a variable display based on specific suspension information. The identification information may be displayed variably. Here, the specific performance may be, for example, a final variation performance. The identification information may be hidden when, for example, step 89AKS52 is executed. The identification information may be placed in the normal display state, for example, when step 89AKS55 is executed.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

A variable display based on suspension information different from the specific suspension information stored in the suspension storage means is a variable display from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived, rather than a specific variable display when the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. The time may be shortened. Here, the variable display time may be short, for example, if the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PD1-1 is 500 ms.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

A case where a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance in a specific variable display is provided, the specific performance execution means is capable of continuously executing the specific performance a plurality of times, and is controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific variable display. Alternatively, when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, it is possible to suggest that the vehicle will be controlled to an advantageous state by any one of a plurality of specific performances, and that the vehicle will be controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific variable display. If the specific suspension information is not stored in the suspension storage means, it is possible to suggest that the system will not be controlled to an advantageous state by all of the multiple specific performances, and it can be suggested that the control will not be controlled to an advantageous state by all of the multiple specific performances. If it is suggested that the content is not displayed, a predetermined display result may be derived in response to the last specific effect. Here, the specific performance may be, for example, a preview performance. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the preview performance process in step AKS108. The case where it is possible to suggest that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be the case, for example, when a preview performance is executed in which the preview content is a winning notice. A case where it is possible to suggest that the game will not be controlled in an advantageous state may be the case, for example, when a preview effect is executed in which the preview content is a loss notice. Deriving the predetermined display result in response to the last specific performance may be, for example, by stopping and displaying the small symbols by executing step 89AKS71.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

The special identification information may not be included in the identification information that can be displayed while variable display is being performed. For example, the V symbol with the symbol number "10" may be used as a suggestion at the time of special ending.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

When the specific pending information is stored in the pending storage means, after deriving a predetermined display result as a display result of the reduced identification information in the specific variable display, the variable display based on the specific pending information is controlled to be in an advantageous state. may be able to be notified in a manner different from the specific notification. For example, it is sufficient if the small symbol change setting process of step 89AKS03 is not executed.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(Explanation regarding problem solving means and effects of feature part 90AK)
A gaming machine that performs a variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and a reservation storage means that can store information regarding the variable display as reservation information; A starting winning means that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which the game medium passes through the starting area more easily than the first state, and a starting winning means that is controllable to a special state that makes it easier to change to the second state. a special state control means, a special state ending means for terminating the special state based on the number of executions of the variable display in the special state, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in response to the final variable display in the special state; The performance execution means includes a pre-performance execution means capable of executing a pre-performance for displaying a display number of specific images related to the number of stored hold information in the hold storage means; specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that has been executed, and the specific performance execution means holds specific pending information regarding a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state but is controlled to an advantageous state based on the last variable display. If it is not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the control will not be controlled to an advantageous state up to the number of times corresponding to the number of times the specific image is displayed, and control to the advantageous state based on the last variable display. or when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect indicating that the specific image will be controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images; The last variable display is performed when the specific pending information is stored in the pending storage means and the number of variable displays performed before the variable display based on the specific pending information is the first number and the second number. In this case, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is the same, and it is controlled to an advantageous state by the specific performance related to any of the specific images displayed in the preliminary performance. The degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether the game is suggested or not. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning hole 13, the second starting winning hole 14, etc. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pending storage means may be, for example, a second pending storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the final variation performance process of step 89AKS02. The preliminary performance may be, for example, an acquisition performance. The preliminary performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition performance process in step AKS104. The specific performance may be, for example, a preview performance. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the preview performance process in step AKS108. The specific performance that suggests that the game will not be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a preview performance that is a loss notice in which the preview content is a loss. The specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a preview performance in which the preview content is a winning notice. The common variable display time may be, for example, if the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns PC1-3 is 140000 ms. The degree of advantage for the player may be different if, for example, the winning preview character is determined according to determination example 90AKD11.
According to such a configuration, appropriate performance control becomes possible.

(Explanation regarding problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
A gaming machine that performs a variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and a reservation storage means that can store information regarding the variable display as reservation information; A starting winning means that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which the game medium passes through the starting area more easily than the first state, and a starting winning means that is controllable to a special state that makes it easier to change to the second state. a special state control means, a special state ending means for terminating the special state based on the number of executions of the variable display in the special state, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in response to the final variable display in the special state; The performance execution means includes a pre-performance execution means capable of executing a pre-performance for displaying a display number of specific images related to the number of stored hold information in the hold storage means; specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that has been executed, and the specific performance execution means holds specific pending information regarding a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state but is controlled to an advantageous state based on the last variable display. If it is not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the control will not be controlled to an advantageous state up to the number of times corresponding to the number of times the specific image is displayed, and control to the advantageous state based on the last variable display. or when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect indicating that the specific image will be controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images; The last variable display is performed when the specific pending information is stored in the pending storage means and the number of variable displays performed before the variable display based on the specific pending information is the first number and the second number. In this case, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is common, and the preliminary effect execution means prompts the firing of the game media toward the starting area in the final variable display. After the promotional performance is executed, the preliminary performance can be executed, and when the execution of the preliminary performance is started in a state where the suspension information is stored up to the maximum number of times that can be stored in the suspension storage means, the start area is set. Whether the game medium passes or not, it is possible to execute a pre-effect that displays the same number of display images as the upper limit, and it is possible to execute the pre-effect in a state where pending information has not been stored up to the upper limit. At the time of starting, whether or not the game medium passes through the starting area, it is possible to execute a pre-effect that displays a specific number of images according to the number of stored hold information. After is displayed, the special performance can be executed, and the special performance is not executed when the upper limit number of pending information is not stored. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning hole 13, the second starting winning hole 14, etc. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pending storage means may be, for example, a second pending storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the final variation performance process of step 89AKS02. The preliminary performance may be, for example, an acquisition performance. The preliminary performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition performance process in step AKS104. The specific performance may be, for example, a preview performance. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the preview performance process in step AKS108. The specific performance that suggests that the game will not be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a preview performance that is a loss notice in which the preview content is a loss. The specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a preview performance in which the preview content is a winning notice. The common variable display time may be, for example, if the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns PC1-3 is 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed as long as, for example, an acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. For example, if the second pending memory number is 4 according to decision example 91AKD01, the number of acquisition items is determined to be 5 and the acquisition is executed in advance to display the same number of specific images as the upper limit number of pending information that can be stored. It would be fine if it was a performance. For example, according to decision example 91AKD01, if the second pending memory number is less than 4, the number of acquired items is determined to be greater than or equal to the second pending memory number. It may be an acquisition performance that is executed. The special performance may be, for example, a performance that increases expectations. The special effect may not be executed if, for example, the expectation level increasing effect is prohibited in steps 91AKS12 and 91AKS13.
According to such a configuration, appropriate performance control becomes possible.

(Explanation regarding problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine that performs a variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and a reservation storage means that can store information regarding the variable display as reservation information; A starting winning means that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which the game medium passes through the starting area more easily than the first state, and a starting winning means that is controllable to a special state that makes it easier to change to the second state. a special state control means, a special state ending means for terminating the special state based on the number of executions of the variable display in the special state, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in response to the final variable display in the special state; The performance execution means includes a pre-performance execution means capable of executing a pre-performance for displaying a display number of specific images related to the number of stored hold information in the hold storage means; specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that has been executed, and the specific performance execution means holds specific pending information regarding a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state but is controlled to an advantageous state based on the last variable display. If it is not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the control will not be controlled to an advantageous state up to the number of times corresponding to the number of times the specific image is displayed, and control to the advantageous state based on the last variable display. or when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect indicating that the specific image will be controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images; The last variable display is performed when the specific pending information is stored in the pending storage means and the number of variable displays performed before the variable display based on the specific pending information is the first number and the second number. In this case, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is common, and the preliminary effect execution means prompts the firing of the game media toward the starting area in the final variable display. After the promotional performance is executed, the preliminary performance can be executed, and when the execution of the preliminary performance is started in a state where the suspension information is stored up to the maximum number of times that can be stored in the suspension storage means, the start area is set. Whether the game medium passes or not, it is possible to perform a preliminary effect that displays the same number of specific images as the upper limit, and after displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit, It is possible to perform a change effect that changes the display mode, and in the change effect, the display mode of a specific image is changed when the game medium passes through the starting area, and the change is performed when the game medium does not pass through the starting area. The display mode of a specific image is changed when the performance ends. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning hole 13, the second starting winning hole 14, etc. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pending storage means may be, for example, a second pending storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the final variation performance process of step 89AKS02. The preliminary performance may be, for example, an acquisition performance. The preliminary performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition performance process in step AKS104. The specific performance may be, for example, a preview performance. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the preview performance process in step AKS108. The specific performance that suggests that the game will not be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a preview performance that is a loss notice in which the preview content is a loss. The specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a preview performance in which the preview content is a winning notice. The common variable display time may be, for example, if the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns PC1-3 is 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed as long as, for example, an acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. For example, if the second pending memory number is 4 according to decision example 91AKD01, the number of acquisition items is determined to be 5 and the acquisition is executed in advance to display the same number of specific images as the upper limit number of pending information that can be stored. It would be fine if it was a performance. The change performance may be, for example, a performance that increases the level of expectation. Changing the display mode of the specific image when the change effect ends may be performed by, for example, executing the expectation level increase effect when the expectation level increase condition 92AKC02 is set.
According to such a configuration, appropriate performance control becomes possible.

A gaming machine that performs a variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and a reservation storage means that can store information regarding the variable display as reservation information; A starting winning means that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which the game medium passes through the starting area more easily than the first state, and a starting winning means that is controllable to a special state that makes it easier to change to the second state. a special state control means, a special state ending means for terminating the special state based on the number of executions of the variable display in the special state, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in response to the final variable display in the special state; The performance execution means includes a pre-performance execution means capable of executing a pre-performance for displaying a display number of specific images related to the number of stored hold information in the hold storage means; specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that has been executed, and the specific performance execution means holds specific pending information regarding a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state but is controlled to an advantageous state based on the last variable display. If it is not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the control will not be controlled to an advantageous state up to the number of times corresponding to the number of times the specific image is displayed, and control to the advantageous state based on the last variable display. or when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect indicating that the specific image will be controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images; The last variable display is performed when the specific pending information is stored in the pending storage means and the number of variable displays performed before the variable display based on the specific pending information is the first number and the second number. In this case, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is common, and the preliminary effect execution means prompts the firing of the game media toward the starting area in the final variable display. After the promotional performance is executed, the preliminary performance can be executed, and when the execution of the preliminary performance is started in a state where the suspension information is stored up to the maximum number of times that can be stored in the suspension storage means, the start area is set. Whether the game medium passes or not, it is possible to perform a preliminary effect that displays the same number of specific images as the upper limit, and after displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit, It is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode, and in the change effect, a specific image may be changed to a predetermined display mode. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning hole 13, the second starting winning hole 14, etc. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pending storage means may be, for example, a second pending storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the final variation performance process of step 89AKS02. The preliminary performance may be, for example, an acquisition performance. The preliminary performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition performance process in step AKS104. The specific performance may be, for example, a preview performance. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the preview performance process in step AKS108. The specific performance that suggests that the game will not be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a preview performance that is a loss notice in which the preview content is a loss. The specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a preview performance in which the preview content is a winning notice. The common variable display time may be, for example, if the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns PC1-3 is 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed as long as, for example, an acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. For example, if the second pending memory number is 4 according to decision example 91AKD01, the number of acquisition items is determined to be 5 and the acquisition is executed in advance to display the same number of specific images as the upper limit number of pending information that can be stored. It would be fine if it was a performance. The change performance may be, for example, a performance that increases the level of expectation. Changing the specific image to a predetermined display mode in the change effect may be performed by, for example, executing the expectation level increase effect when the expectation level increase condition 92AKC01 is set.
According to such a configuration, appropriate performance control becomes possible.

A gaming machine that performs a variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and a reservation storage means that can store information regarding the variable display as reservation information; A starting winning means that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which the game medium passes through the starting area more easily than the first state, and a starting winning means that is controllable to a special state that makes it easier to change to the second state. a special state control means, a special state ending means for terminating the special state based on the number of executions of the variable display in the special state, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in response to the final variable display in the special state; The performance execution means includes a pre-performance execution means capable of executing a pre-performance for displaying a display number of specific images related to the number of stored hold information in the hold storage means; specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that has been executed, and the specific performance execution means holds specific pending information regarding a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state but is controlled to an advantageous state based on the last variable display. If it is not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the control will not be controlled to an advantageous state up to the number of times corresponding to the number of times the specific image is displayed, and control to the advantageous state based on the last variable display. or when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect indicating that the specific image will be controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images; The last variable display is performed when the specific pending information is stored in the pending storage means and the number of variable displays performed before the variable display based on the specific pending information is the first number and the second number. In this case, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is common, and the preliminary effect execution means prompts the firing of the game media toward the starting area in the final variable display. After the promotional performance is executed, the preliminary performance can be executed, and when the execution of the preliminary performance is started in a state where the suspension information is stored up to the maximum number of times that can be stored in the suspension storage means, the start area is set. Whether the game medium passes or not, it is possible to perform a preliminary effect that displays the same number of specific images as the upper limit, and after displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit, It is possible to perform a change effect that changes the display mode, and in the change effect, the display mode of a specific image is changed when the game medium passes through the starting area, and when the game medium does not pass through the start area, the change effect is executed. does not need to be executed. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning hole 13, the second starting winning hole 14, etc. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pending storage means may be, for example, a second pending storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, the variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state ending means may be, for example, the CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the final variation performance process of step 89AKS02. The preliminary performance may be, for example, an acquisition performance. The preliminary performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition performance process in step AKS104. The specific performance may be, for example, a preview performance. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 101 that executes the preview performance process in step AKS108. The specific performance that suggests that the game will not be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a preview performance that is a loss notice in which the preview content is a loss. The specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a preview performance in which the preview content is a winning notice. The common variable display time may be, for example, if the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns PC1-3 is 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed as long as, for example, an acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. For example, if the second pending memory number is 4 according to decision example 91AKD01, the number of acquisition items is determined to be 5 and the acquisition is executed in advance to display the same number of specific images as the upper limit number of pending information that can be stored. It would be fine if it was a performance. The change performance may be, for example, a performance that increases the level of expectation. Not executing the change effect when the game medium does not pass through the starting area may be, for example, executing the expectation level increase effect when the expectation level increase condition 92AKC03 is set.

(Explanation regarding problem solving means and effects common to characteristic parts 90AK to 92AK)
The pre-effect execution means is capable of executing a pre-effect to display a specific number of images that is the same as the maximum number of images that can be stored in the hold information in the hold storage means; It is possible to execute specific effects related to specific images in sequence, and when the number of variable displays performed before the variable display based on the specific pending information is a third number, the specific effects corresponding to the third number of times can be executed sequentially. It may be possible to suggest that the image will be controlled in an advantageous state by a specific effect related to a specific image before the image. Here, the preliminary effect of displaying the same number of specific images as the upper limit number for storing pending information may be, for example, an acquisition effect when the number of acquired characters is determined to be "5". The fact that the specific effects can be performed sequentially may be sufficient if, for example, a preview effect that starts at timings AKT11 to AKT15 is executed. The specific performance related to the specific image before the specific image corresponding to the third number of times may be, for example, a preview performance of the winning notice number determined by decision example 90AKD01.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control becomes possible.

The preliminary performance execution means may be capable of executing a passing notification performance based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area during the execution of the preliminary performance. For example, it is sufficient if the winning notification performance is executed in steps 90AKS08 and 90AKS09.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control becomes possible.

The preliminary effect execution means may display the specific images sequentially at a predetermined timing when the reservation storage means stores the reservation information up to the maximum number of times that can be stored. For example, it is sufficient if the acquisition effect is executed at the acquisition character increase timing set in step 90AKS19.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control becomes possible.

It may be possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific image as the game medium passes through the starting area. Here, the change performance may be, for example, a performance that increases the level of expectation.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control becomes possible.

Among the specific images, when a first image that can suggest that the related specific effect will be controlled in an advantageous state is displayed, a specific image that is later than the first image is displayed. A second image that is less likely to be controlled to an advantageous state may be displayed. For example, it may be the case that an effect image showing the character determined in steps 90AKS15 and 90AKS16 is displayed.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control becomes possible.

When execution of the specific performance is started, it may be possible to perform a special notification performance that notifies that the maximum number of hold information is not stored in the hold storage means. For example, when the acquisition promotion notification is executed in step AKS203 and the second pending storage number is less than the upper limit number, the notification mode may be changed.
In such a configuration, appropriate performance control becomes possible.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 100AK)
Next, the feature section 100AK will be explained. In the feature section 100AK, descriptions of parts (configuration, processing, etc.) common to the above embodiments (FIGS. 1 to 17) will be omitted.

The feature section 100AK is a modification of the embodiment (particularly the feature section 89AK) according to the above-described FIGS. 17-1 to 17-29. In the above embodiment, when specific pending information corresponding to a winning variation in the final variation of the special state is stored, a preview performance of a winning notice that suggests a winning is always executed. In the characteristic section 100AK, even when specific pending information is stored in the final change of the special state, a winning notice is not executed, and a losing notice is executed and a winning notification (win and notification) indicating that the specific pending information is stored is executed. In some cases, a loss notification (specific notification of a loss) is not executed, and a loss notification (specific notification of a loss) is executed. In this case, it is announced that the relief effect will be executed in the variation that actually becomes a winning variation, resulting in a winning. By providing such a performance pattern, even if a loss notification is executed in the final change of the special state, a relief performance may be executed and a win may occur, so it is possible to execute a surprising performance and also to improve the player's performance. can maintain a sense of expectation.

FIG. 18-1 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern of the characteristic portion 100AK. In the feature section 100AK, in addition to the variation pattern shown in FIG. 17-3, a variation pattern PC1-4 with a special figure variation time of 145000 ms (milliseconds) is provided as a variation pattern for the final variation of the special state. The variation pattern PC1-4 is a variation pattern that corresponds to not executing winning notification even when specific pending information is stored in the final variation of the special state. On the other hand, the variation pattern PC1-3 is a variation pattern that corresponds to execution of notification when specific pending information is stored in the final variation of the special state. In this way, in this embodiment, the variation pattern of the final variation of the special state is divided depending on whether or not there is a winning notification. By determining the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not to execute a hit notification when specific pending information is stored in the final variation of the special state.

In addition, the method of determining whether to execute a hit notification when specific pending information is stored in the final change of the special state is not limited to this, for example, if specific pending information is stored in the final change of the special state. The production control board 80 may decide whether or not to execute the notification.

Fluctuation pattern PC1-4 executes a loss notification and performs an effect (result display at the time of loss, etc.) indicating that the special state ends, so the special symbol fluctuation time is 5000ms longer than fluctuation pattern PC1-3. ing. Thereby, it is possible to select the variation time according to the notification pattern in the final variation of the special state.

In addition, when the specific pending information of the final variation of the special state is stored, it is decided whether or not to execute the winning notification, and then the variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the decision result. You can. In this case, when it is determined not to perform the win notification, a fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PC1-4) with a longer fluctuation time may be determined than when it is determined to perform the win notification. Then, when it is determined to perform the winning notification, a fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PC1-3) with a shorter fluctuation time may be determined than when it is determined not to perform the winning notification. In addition, when it is decided not to perform the winning notification, instead of always deciding on a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, variation pattern PC1-4), it may be possible to easily decide on a variation pattern with a long variation time. . Furthermore, when it is determined to execute the winning notification, instead of always determining a variation pattern with a short variation time (for example, variation pattern PC1-3), a variation pattern with a short variation time may be easily determined.

In addition, when the winning notification is carried out in a longer time than the losing notification, etc., a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PC1- 3) The fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PC1-4) corresponding to not executing the hit notification even if the specific pending information is stored in the special state final fluctuation is lengthened. Good too.

FIG. 18-2 shows an example of determining the variation pattern of the characteristic portion 100AK. In the feature section 100AK, a decision example AKE06 shown in FIG. 18-2(A) is used instead of the decision example AKE04 shown in FIG. 17-4(D). As shown in FIG. 18-2 (A), in the determination example AKE06 in which the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state of the feature part 100AK is 0, which is the final fluctuation, the variable display result of the special symbol is "lost". If so, the variable patterns PC1-3 and PC1-4 become determinable patterns, and if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", only the variable pattern PC3-3 becomes a determinable pattern.

FIG. 18-2(B) shows a specific example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern when the final variation of the special state fails. The variation pattern of the final variation of the special state is determined based on the storage contents of the second pending memory. As shown in FIG. 18-2 (B), in the pending information stored as the second pending memory, specific pending information corresponding to the variable display of "hit" where the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol or a small winning symbol. If not stored, the variation pattern PC1-3 is determined at a rate of 100%. Specific pending information is stored as the second pending memory, and if the hit type is the second special jackpot or the small hit via jackpot X (first small hit), the fluctuation pattern PC1- 3, and the fluctuation pattern PC1-4 is determined at a rate of 10%. Specific pending information is stored as the second pending memory, and if the winning type is other than the second special figure jackpot or the jackpot via small hit X (first small hit), the fluctuation pattern PC1 -3, and not the variation pattern PC1-4.

In addition, the second special jackpot and the jackpot This type of jackpot is more advantageous than other jackpot types (see Figure 2). In this embodiment, the variation pattern PC1-4 can be determined only when specific pending information that is such an advantageous jackpot type is stored. As mentioned above, the variation pattern PC1-4 is a variation pattern that corresponds to the notification of a win through a rescue performance after a loss is announced, so it is advantageous if such a performance is executed. By making the type of jackpot more favorable, it is possible to prevent players from being disappointed due to the type of jackpot being disadvantageous even though they have been rescued, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the performance.

In addition, if the jackpot type is different from the example shown in FIG. 2, the number of jackpot rounds (the number of balls that can be obtained), the presence or absence of probability change control after the end of the jackpot game state, the number of changes in probability change control, and the end of the jackpot game state. The degree of advantage of the jackpot type is determined based on at least one of the presence or absence of later time-saving control and the number of changes in the time-saving control, and only when the jackpot type of the specific pending information is the most advantageous jackpot type, the special state final It may be possible to determine a variation pattern that corresponds to the notification of a win as a relief effect after a loss is reported in the variation.

In addition, if a winning notification is made in a pattern in which a winning notification is made by relief performance after a loss is announced in the final variation of the special state, it is not limited to the most advantageous jackpot type; The jackpot type may be set to be the most advantageous jackpot type based on probability.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 18-2, the ratio determined for the variation pattern PC1-4 corresponding to the notification of winning by relief performance after being notified of a loss in the final variation of the special state is This is lower than the rate determined for the variation pattern PC1-3, which corresponds to being notified of a win in the final variation. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest when the winning notification is executed by the rescue performance. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the game from losing interest due to frequent notifications of losing even though specific pending information is stored in the special state final variation.

FIG. 18-3 shows that in both the special state final variation of the feature section 100AK and the variation display based on the pending information corresponding to the second pending storage number 1 and 2, the display result of the special symbol is a losing symbol. In the variable display based on the reservation information corresponding to the second reservation memory number of 3, in relation to the case of "hit" where the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol, 5 times. It shows the execution period and execution timing of various performances including preview performances (loss notice). In the reservation information stored as the second reservation memory, the reservation information corresponding to the variable display of "hit" in which the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol is also referred to as specific reservation information.

For example, based on the winning type being determined as the first special symbol jackpot C, the display result of the first special symbol becomes "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and after this jackpot gaming state ends, the special When controlled by the state, three variable displays can be performed in the special state. Then, the variable display corresponding to the remaining number of times of 2 and 1 is executed, and the display result becomes "lost" in each variable display. At timing AKT01, a variation display that is the final variation of the special state is started.

Figure 18-3 shows the case where variation pattern PC1-4 is determined, which corresponds to not executing a winning notice (specific notification of winning) even when specific pending information is stored in the final variation of the special state. An example is shown. In the special state final variation, in the variable display of performance symbols and small symbols, with the start of the special state final variation, all symbol variations in which all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol vary are started. Note that in response to the start of the final variation of the special state, the performance symbols may be set to a non-display state so that the performance symbols are not displayed. Thereafter, at timing AKT02, execution of the acquisition effect is started, and the number of characters displayed in the panel-like effect image serving as the specific image may be increased in accordance with the elapsed time. When the timing AKT03 is reached, the execution of the acquisition effect is completed, the execution of the expectation level increasing effect is started, and the display mode of the panel-shaped effect image serving as the specific image can be changed. In the expectation level increasing performance, when a game ball entering the second starting prize opening 14 is detected, it is sufficient that the display mode of the specific image may change or may not change. When the display mode of a specific image changes due to the effect of increasing the expectation level, the expectation level of winning increases. Then, at timing AKT04, the execution of the expectation level increasing effect ends.

Next, at timing AKT11, execution of the preview effect is started. In the case shown in FIG. 18-3, each preview performance is executed corresponding to each of the timings AKT11 to AKT15, so that a total of five preview performances are performed. When five preview performances are performed, the first preview performance can indicate whether the final change in the special state is a success or a loss, and the second preview performance corresponds to the second pending memory number of 1. The fluctuating display can suggest whether it is a win or a loss, and the fluctuating display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 2 can suggest whether it is a win or a loss by the third preview performance, and the second preview performance can indicate whether the fluctuating display is a win or a loss. The variable display corresponding to the number of pending memories of 3 can suggest whether it is a win or a loss, and the variable display corresponding to the second number of pending memories of 4 can suggest whether it is a win or a loss by the fifth preview performance. When all of the five preview performances that suggest a loss are executed, it is possible to suggest that all of the variation displays corresponding to the final variation of the special state and the second pending memory are a loss. However, the number of executions of the preview performance and the number of executions of the variable display do not strictly match each other, but only need to be at a level that can be suggested. For example, if any of the variable displays is a win, the number of times the preview effect is executed may be smaller than the number of times the variable display is executed. In this case, it is possible to suggest that the fluctuating display is a hit by giving a preview performance that is executed a smaller number of times than the number of times the fluctuating display is executed until the fluctuating display becomes a hit. In addition, if all of the variable displays are loses or if the winning notification is not executed even if a win is included, the number of times the preview performance is executed may be greater than the number of times the variable display is executed. In this way, even if the number of executions of the preview performance and the number of executions of the variable display are different, the number of executions of each other tends to be close, giving the player the impression that the preview performance and the variable display are related. It would be good if you could.

At timing AKT16 shown in FIG. 18-3, the small symbols of the losing combination are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped). As a result, in addition to the preview performance, a small symbol indicates that the special state final variation and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory will result in a loss.

Further, after the fifth preview performance is completed at timing AKT16 shown in FIG. 18-3, a loss response performance is executed in response to the fact that all the preview performances suggesting a loss have been executed. A specific notification that notifies that a jackpot or small hit will not occur due to the execution of a preview performance that suggests a loss or a performance that corresponds to a loss, and that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. is possible. Thereafter, for example, when the special state final variation reaches the final stage, a loss result display AKR01 is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. The result display AKR01 at the time of loss is the number of consecutive wins (number of wins controlled until the end of the special state, etc.) or prize balls that are paid out in the small win game state or jackpot game state until the special state ends. Any display effect may be used as long as it informs the player of the number of game balls and the like in a way that is recognizable to the player. Then, at timing AKT21, the special state final variation ends.

In addition, the production content up to timing AKT21 is the example shown in Figure 17-5, which corresponds to the case of "loss" in the variable display based on the pending information corresponding to 4, which is the upper limit of the second pending memory number. It is similar to That is, in the example shown in FIG. 18-3, in the final variation of the special state, although specific pending information corresponding to a "win" is stored in the second pending memory, the specific pending information is not stored. The same effect is being performed when it is not being used.

Following such a final change in the special state, the change display corresponding to the second reserved memory is sequentially executed. In the case shown in Figure 18-3, the final variation in the special state and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 1 and 2 both correspond to "losing" where the display result of the special symbol is a losing symbol. In the variable display of small symbols, the determined small symbols of the losing combination are stopped and displayed. In the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 1 and 2, the variable display result is "lost", and the variable pattern PD1-1 is determined by the determination example AKE05 shown in FIG. 17-4(E). , the start and end of the variable display is repeated within a short period of time.

In the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 3, it is announced that the rescue effect is executed and a win is achieved. In response to a "win" in which the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol, in the variable display of small symbols, the determined small symbol of the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Further, in response to the variable display result being "win", the variable display ends at timing AKT31, and a jackpot or small win occurs.

FIG. 18-4 shows an example of a small symbol that is stopped and displayed after the final change in the special state of the feature section 100AK. The pending information corresponding to the second pending memory number of 3 is specific pending information that corresponds to a "win", and if a winning notice (specific notification of a winning) is executed in the final change of the special state, , As shown in Figure 18-4 (A), in the special state final variation and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 1 and 2, the display result of the special symbol is a "losing symbol". ”, in the variable display of small symbols, fixed small symbols are stopped and displayed as a special display result in which a special symbol is included in the medium symbol. In the variable display where the second retention memory number is 3, in response to a "win" where the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol, in the variable display of the small symbol, the determined small winning combination is The pattern will be stopped and displayed. In this way, in the final variation of the special state and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory until the winning variation, the stop pattern of the small symbol in which the small symbol that becomes the special display result is stopped and displayed is also used as the first pattern. say.

This is specific pending information that corresponds to the pending information corresponding to the second pending memory number of 3 becoming a "win", and if a loss notice (specific notification of a loss) is executed in the final change of the special state, , As shown in Figure 18-4 (B), in the special state final variation and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 1 and 2, the display result of the special symbol is a "losing" symbol. ”, in the variable display of small symbols, the determined small symbols of the losing combination are stopped and displayed. Then, in the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 3, the relief effect will notify you that it will be a hit, and the display result of the special symbol will correspond to a "hit" that becomes a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol. , In the variable display of small symbols, the determined small symbols of the winning combination are stopped and displayed. In this way, in the special state final variation and the variation display corresponding to the second pending memory until the winning variation, the small symbols of the losing combination are stopped and displayed, and the small symbols for which the winning notification is executed in the winning variation are displayed. The stop pattern is also referred to as a second pattern.

If the specific pending information corresponding to a "win" is not stored in the second pending memory, as shown in Figure 18-4 (B), the final change in the special state and the number of second pending memories are 1. In the variable display corresponding to 4 to 4, in response to "loss" where the display result of the special symbol is a losing symbol, in the variable display of the small symbol, the determined small symbol of the losing combination is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 18-5 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the small symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) when a winning notice is executed in the final variation of the special state. As shown in FIG. 18-5 (A), at timing AKT01, a variation display that is the final variation of the special state is started, at timing AKT11, the first preview effect (loss notice) is executed, and at timing AKT12, the second notice effect is executed. When a preview performance (win notice) is executed, when the second preview performance ends at timing AKT13 (for example, when a hit is suggested by the preview performance), a special symbol that shows the letter V in the middle symbol is displayed. The small pattern of the special display result that includes the small pattern is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped). As a result, in addition to the preview performance, a small symbol indicates that the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory will be a win. Thereafter, in response to the execution of the preview performance that is a win notice, a win corresponding performance is executed, and the special state final variation ends at timing AKT21. When the final variation of the special state ends at timing AKT21, the determined small symbol that becomes the special display result is stopped and displayed.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when a win is suggested by a win notice, a small symbol that is a special display result is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped). Since the small symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) when the player is paying attention to the preview performance, the fact that the small symbols are stopped and displayed can be made less noticeable. In this case, it is preferable that the preview performance be executed in a conspicuous manner that attracts the player's attention more easily than the small symbols. For example, it suffices if the performance image related to the preview performance is larger than the small pattern or has a higher display priority. This makes it possible to make it less noticeable that the small symbols are stopped and displayed.

In addition, the timing to temporarily stop the small symbol that is the special display result is not limited to the end of the notice performance that is a hit notice, but may be at any timing after the win suggestion is executed in the final variation of the special state. Good too. For example, as shown in Figure 18-5 (B), a special display result may be displayed during a winning performance (for example, during a preview performance, an epilogue of a reach performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) after a winning preview performance ends. The small pattern may be temporarily stopped. By doing this, the small symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) when the player is paying attention to the winning performance, so that the fact that the small symbols are stopped and displayed can be made less noticeable. In this case, it is preferable that the winning performance be executed in a conspicuous manner that attracts the player's attention more easily than the small symbols. For example, it suffices if the performance image related to the winning performance is larger than the small symbol or has a higher display priority. This makes it possible to make it less noticeable that the small symbols are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 18-6 is a flowchart showing the performance symbol variation start process (S801) in the performance control process process (S705) of the feature section 100AK. In FIG. 18-6, processes similar to the production symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 17-7 are given the same numbers and the description thereof will be omitted. In the production pattern variation start processing of the feature section 100AK, the production control CPU 101 sets the production pattern display to return to normal by displaying production symbols in the 89AKS55, and then changes the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command to the variation pattern PD3. -1 or PD3-2 is determined (100AKS01). Here, in the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol is a "win".

If the variation pattern is PD3-1 or PD3-2, it is determined whether or not a win has not been reported in the final variation of the special state (100AKS02). Whether or not the win is not reported in the final special state variation may be determined by, for example, whether or not the win not reported flag is on.

If the win has not yet been announced, settings are made to execute a relief effect that notifies you of a win during the variable display based on the variable pattern PD3-1 or PD3-2 (100AKS03). Also, in 100AKS03, the hit/unreported flag may be reset.

If the variation pattern is other than PD3-1 or PD3-2, and if there is no hit notification, the process moves to AKS012 after executing the process of 100AKS03. When the settings for executing the relief effect are made in the process of 100AKS03, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution of the relief effect may be determined in AK0S012.

FIG. 18-7 is a flowchart showing the acquisition effect processing (AKS104) in the final variation effect processing (89AKS02) of the feature section 100AK. In FIG. 18-7, processing similar to the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12 is given the same number and the description thereof will be omitted. In the acquisition performance start process of the feature section 100AK, if the AKS 201 determines that the acquisition performance has started, the performance control CPU 101 changes the current variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command to the variation pattern PC1-4. It is determined whether there is one (100AKS11). Here, in the final variation of the special state, when specific pending information corresponding to a "win" is stored in the second pending memory, the variation pattern corresponds to executing a loss notification without executing a win notification. It is determined whether or not. If the variation pattern is not PC1-4, the process moves to AKS202, and if the variation pattern is PC1-4, a win notification is set (100AKS12). For example, a hit/unreported flag provided in the RAM 103 may be set. Thereafter, the process moves to 90AKS03, and processing for executing a loss notice is performed.

By executing the effect symbol variation start process in Figure 18-6 and the acquisition effect process in Figure 18-7, if the variation pattern of the special state final variation is PC1-4, a hit notification will be executed in the special state final variation. Instead, it is possible to perform a rescue performance and notify a win in a variation that actually becomes a win (a win variation based on the second pending memory stored at the end of the special state).

Figure 18-8 shows a winning result when a relief effect is executed during a variation that actually becomes a win (a winning variation based on the specific pending information stored at the end of the special state) without executing a win notification in the final variation of the special state. A display example when executing notification is shown. The display example shown in FIG. 18-8 corresponds to the execution timing etc. shown in FIG. 18-3.

In the special state final variation, it is assumed that the variation pattern PC1-4 is determined based on the determination ratio shown in FIG. 18-2. In this case, based on the determination result of 90AKS03 in FIG. 18-7, a preview effect as shown in FIG. 18-8(A) is executed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the final change of the special state. The preview performance shown in FIG. 18-8(A) shows, for example, the fifth preview performance after the first to fourth failure notices have been executed. Here, the preview performance is a battle performance in which an ally character (on the right) and an enemy character battle. Further, at this time, a variable display of small symbols is being executed in the small symbol display area 9K. In the fifth preview performance, as shown in FIG. 18-8(B), a scene in which an ally character is defeated is displayed, thereby executing a loss notice that suggests a loss. At this time, the small symbols of the losing combination are temporarily stopped in the small symbol display area 9K. As a result, it is reported that the special state final change is not a win, and that specific pending information that is a win is not stored in the second pending memory. After that, the loss response performance starts.

Then, during the final variation of the special state after that, a loss result display is started as shown in FIG. 18-8(C). As shown in Figure 18-8 (D), the result display at the time of loss shows the number of jackpots controlled until the end of the special state (for example, 8R per jackpot x M, 10R per jack x N, etc. for each jackpot type), and the special Any display effect is sufficient as long as it informs the player of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (for example, total XXXXpt, etc.) in the small win game state or the jackpot game state until the end of the state. When the final variation of the special state ends, the small symbols of the losing combination that have been temporarily stopped are displayed as confirmed.

Thereafter, a variable display corresponding to the second pending storage at the end of the special state is executed. If the variable display result is "lost", the variation pattern PD1-1 is determined by the determination example AKE05 shown in Figure 17-4 (E), and the fluctuation pattern PD1-1 is determined as shown in Figures 18-8 (D) to (G). The start and end of the variable display is repeated within a short period of time (twice here). During this period as well, variable display of small symbols is executed, and small symbols of losing combinations are stopped and displayed.

If the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory at the end of the special state is "win", the variable patterns PD3-1, PD3- 2 is determined, and execution settings for the relief effect are performed at 100AKS03 in FIG. 18-6. Then, as shown in FIG. 18-8 (H), the variable display based on the variable pattern PD3-1 or PD3-2 is started, and as shown in FIG. 18-8 (I), the character's performance image is interrupted. A relief effect in which the result display is erased in the event of a loss is executed, and as shown in Figure 18-8 (J), the confirmed effect symbol and confirmed small symbol that form a winning combination (specific display result) are stopped and displayed, indicating a win. It will be announced that something will happen. In this way, when a loss notification is performed and a result is displayed when a loss occurs, a relief performance may be executed and a win may occur, so it is possible to execute a surprising performance and to improve the player's rescue performance. You can maintain a sense of expectation that it will be implemented.

Note that the effect in which the effect image of the character shown in FIG. 18-8(I) interrupts may be executed as a winning preview effect other than when the relief effect is executed. By doing this, as shown in FIG. 18-8(I), it is possible to notify the player that the rescue effect in which the effect image is inserted has been executed, resulting in a win. Note that the presentation form of the rescue presentation is not limited to this, and may be other presentations such as a presentation where the presentation symbols and small symbols change from a losing combination to a winning combination, a presentation where movable objects move, etc.

(Modified example of characteristic part 100AK)
This feature section is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The processing contents, determination ratios, and methods for determining various effects in the flowcharts shown in the above embodiments and modified examples are merely examples, and the effects similar to those in the above embodiments can be achieved, and the effects shown in the above embodiments can be Any method may be used as long as it can be executed suitably. Further, the performance operation examples shown in the above embodiments are merely examples, and can be modified as appropriate as long as the same performance effects can be achieved. Moreover, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Further, this characteristic part and other characteristic parts may be combined as appropriate.

(Modified example of executing pseudo variable display in special state final variation)
In the above example, in the final change of the special state, a battle performance is executed once or multiple times as a preview performance, and it is suggested and announced that a jackpot or small win will occur or not depending on the performance result (win or loss) of the battle performance. It was supposed to be done. Specific notification to notify that the control will not be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state in the final change of the special state (specific notification indicating a loss suggestion), a specific notification to notify that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state The notification (specific notification suggesting a win) is not limited to this type of performance (battle performance).

For example, in the final variation of the special state, after the start of variable display of performance symbols, the variable display of performance symbols is temporarily stopped due to a losing combination, and then a pseudo variable display is executed multiple times, and the display result at the time of temporary stop is Depending on the final display result (for example, by stopping and displaying the performance symbols of winning combinations and losing combinations), specific notification of winning suggestion or specific notification of losing suggestion may be executed. Note that the pseudo variable display is similar to the pseudo continuous effect in that it makes one variable display appear to be pseudo variable display multiple times. However, in a pseudo-continuous performance, the expectation of winning generally increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases, whereas the pseudo-variable display of this embodiment simply displays one variable display in a pseudo-multiple manner. This is a production to make it look like a variable display of times.

In this embodiment, the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, which is the condition for ending the special state, may be relatively small, such as 3 times or 15 times (see FIG. 2). Furthermore, in the final variation in the special state, variation patterns with long variation times such as variation patterns PC1-3, PC1-4, and PC3-3 are determined. Therefore, by performing a pseudo variable display multiple times in a short span during the final variation of the special state, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the special state has ended after a short number of variation displays, and to reduce interest. It can be prevented. In other words, it is possible to make the number of fluctuation displays in the special state appear larger, and the period of the special state can be made to appear longer.

FIG. 18-9 is a timing chart of the final change in the special state in a modified example in which a pseudo variable display is performed in the final change in the special state. As shown in FIG. 18-9 (A), in the case where the second second pending memory in the final variation of the special state is specific pending information that is a win, specific notification of winning suggestion is executed in the final variation of the special state. In this case, for example, at timing AKT01, a variation display that becomes the final variation of the special state is started, at timing AKT51, the performance symbols that become a losing combination are temporarily stopped and the variation display is restarted, and at timing AKT52, a variation display that becomes a losing combination is started. At timing AKT53, the performance symbols that result in a losing combination are temporarily stopped and the variable display is restarted. A pseudo variable display for temporarily stopping such losing combinations is executed a predetermined number of times.

In addition, the number of pseudo-variable displays in the final variation of the special state, the type of performance symbols that make up the losing combination that temporarily stops, whether or not the losing combination that temporarily stops is used as a chance for a reach loss or a preview, and the second retention memory. The contents of the special state final variation, such as whether to stop displaying the winning combination when the specific pending information is stored and the timing to end the repetition of the pseudo variable display, are determined by the display result of the variation, the variation pattern, and the timing of ending the repetition of the pseudo variable display. 2. It may be determined at the start of the final change of the special state based on the stored contents of the second pending memory. For example, by providing a plurality of pseudo variable display patterns that are associated with scenarios such as the number of times the pseudo variable display is performed, a design that temporarily stops each time, and a final stop pattern, the pseudo variable display patterns can be combined with the display result of the variation, the variation The number of pseudo-variable displays, the combination of performance symbols to be temporarily stopped each time, the final stop symbol, etc. may be determined based on the pattern and the stored contents of the second suspension memory. Note that the number of pseudo-variable displays, the combination of effect symbols temporarily stopped each time, the final stop symbol, etc. may be determined separately.

Note that the span of the pseudo variable display (the variation time of each pseudo variable display) is, for example, the special state such as the variation patterns PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PC1-1, and PC1-2 shown in Figure 18-1. It suffices if the time is the same as the fluctuation pattern selected and sold in . By doing so, each pseudo variable display can be made to look like one variable display in a special state.

Incidentally, when temporarily stopping the performance symbols in the pseudo variable display, the small symbols may also be temporarily stopped.

In FIG. 18-9 (A), a pseudo variable display that temporarily stops losing combinations is executed a predetermined number of times, the pseudo variable display starts at timing AKT61, and the production symbols that become winning combinations are temporarily stopped at timing AKT62. Then, a specific notification of a winning suggestion is executed. Moreover, at this time, the small pattern of the special display result including the special small pattern indicating the letter V in the medium pattern is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped). As a result, in addition to the performance symbols, a small symbol is used to suggest and notify that the variable display corresponding to the second reservation memory will be a hit. Thereafter, a winning response performance is executed, and at timing AKT21, the special state final variation ends, and the performance symbols and small symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, as the winning response performance in this modified example, for example, a performance may be performed that encourages whether or not the performance symbols will change again and be promoted to a more expected winning combination. Thereafter, the variable displays corresponding to the second pending memory are sequentially executed, and in the case shown in Figure 18-9(A), the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 2 corresponds to a win. Then, a variable display based on either of the variable patterns PD3-1 or PD3-2 is executed, and the variable display ends at timing AKT31, and a jackpot or small win occurs.

As shown in Figure 18-9 (B), when the second second pending memory in the special state final variation is specific pending information that is a win, a specific notification indicating a loss is executed in the special state final variation. In this case, for example, at timing AKT01, a variation display that becomes the final variation of the special state is started, at timing AKT51, the performance symbols that become a losing combination are temporarily stopped and the variation display is restarted, and at timing AKT52, a variation display that becomes a losing combination is started. At timing AKT53, the performance symbols that result in a losing combination are temporarily stopped and the variable display is restarted. A pseudo variable display for temporarily stopping such losing combinations is executed a predetermined number of times.

Then, at timing AKT71, the pseudo-variable display is started, and at timing AKT72, the performance symbols that are a losing combination are temporarily stopped, and specific notification of a losing suggestion is executed. Moreover, at this time, the small symbols of the losing combination are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the middle symbols. As a result, in addition to the performance symbols, a small symbol is used to suggest and notify that the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory will result in a loss. Thereafter, a loss response performance is executed, and at timing AKT21, the special state final variation ends, and the performance symbols and small symbols are fixed and stopped. Note that, as the loss response performance in this modification, for example, a performance may be executed to encourage whether or not the performance symbols will change again and change to a winning combination. Thereafter, the variable displays corresponding to the second pending memory are sequentially executed, and in the case shown in Figure 18-9 (B), the variable display corresponding to the second pending memory number of 2 corresponds to a win. Then, a variable display based on either of the variable patterns PD3-1 or PD3-2 is executed, and a relief effect is executed during the variable display to execute a winning notification. Then, the variable display ends at timing AKT31, and a jackpot or small win occurs.

In the final variation of the special state, it may be possible to foretell whether or not the display result of the performance symbols will be a winning combination (whether or not a specific notification of winning suggestion will be executed) by executing a specific notice performance. . FIG. 18-9(C) shows the execution rate when such a specific preview effect is executed. As shown in Figure 18-9 (C), if a win notification (specific notification of a win suggestion) is executed in the final variation of the special state, a loss notification (specific notification of a suggestion of a loss) is executed in the final variation of the special state. The specific preview performance is executed at a higher rate than when it is executed. By doing this, it is possible to give a win suggestion (suggestion that a win notification will be given) through the specific advance notice performance, and even though a loss notice is executed, the specific notice performance is executed and the player You can prevent this from discouraging them or making them feel uncomfortable.

In addition, specific preview effects include, for example, predetermined chances in the pseudo-variable display (odd number matching (such as ``135''), misaligned patterns (such as ``112''), combinations of symbols with puns, and loss including special symbols. It may be an effect that suggests a win by stopping a combination (etc.) a predetermined number of times. In this case, the number of times the chance is stopped (for example, the number of consecutive stops) may be determined depending on whether or not the winning notification is executed. It should be noted that such a preview performance that stops the chance eye may be executed other than the pseudo variable display. For example, a pre-reading preview performance may be executed that increases the expectation level of jackpot or the rate of occurrence of reach after a chance is stopped in a plurality of variable displays. When performing such a pre-read preview effect, it is sufficient to prevent excessive successive chances in the pseudo-variable display. For example, in a case where a reach is confirmed when the chance roll stops three times in a row in a pre-read preview performance, the pseudo variable display may be restricted so that the chance roll does not temporarily stop three times in a row. Alternatively, in the pseudo-variable display, when the chance eye is temporarily stopped three times in a row, the subsequent temporarily stopped symbols may be a combination of reach-loss.

Note that the ratio shown in FIG. 18-9(C) is just an example, and the ratio may be different between the case where the winning notification is executed and the case where the loss notification is executed. For example, when a loss notification (specific notification indicating a loss suggestion) is executed in the final variation of a special state, a higher rate of identification is performed than when a winning notification (specific notification indicating a win suggestion) is executed in the final variation of the special state. A preview performance may be executed. By doing so, even when the specific advance notice performance is not executed, it is possible to make the user expect that the winning notification will be executed, and even when the loss notice is executed, the specific advance notice performance can arouse expectations. In addition, when the loss notification is executed, the specific preview performance may be executed at a higher rate when there is specific pending information in the second pending memory than when there is specific pending information in the second pending memory. good. By doing this, even if a specific advance notice effect is executed and a loss notification is executed, it is possible to suggest that a relief effect will be executed afterwards.

In addition, the specific notice performance in the special state final variation is not based on whether or not the winning notification is executed at the special state final variation, but on whether or not there is a win in the special state final variation or the variation display based on the second pending memory. The execution rate may be determined. If there is a win in the final variation of the special state or the variation display based on the second pending memory, the execution ratio of the specific notice effect regardless of whether a win notification is executed in the final variation of the special state or a loss notification is executed. may be constant.

In the above embodiment, the second pattern in which a relief effect is executed during a winning variation without notifying the winning notification at the final variation of the special state corresponds to the final variation of the special state and the second pending memory until the winning variation occurs. In the variable display, the small symbols of losing combinations were stopped and displayed (see Figures 18-4(B) and 18-8). Not limited to this, in the case where a relief performance is executed in a winning variation without executing a winning notification in the special state final variation, the variation corresponding to the special state final variation and the second pending memory until the winning variation becomes At least once in any one of the display, a determined small symbol that is a special display result in which a special symbol (a small symbol indicating the letter V) is included in the medium symbol may be stopped and displayed. Further, a stop display pattern of such small symbols may be provided. By doing this, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game will be a win before the win is announced. Even if the win notification is not executed, the player can recognize that he or she has won by watching the display results of the small symbols. In addition, during the execution of the relief performance, during the fluctuation before the winning combination (specific display result) is stopped and displayed (for example, in the stage of Fig. 18-8 (I), etc.), a special symbol is included in the middle symbol. A small symbol resulting in a special display result may be stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) to suggest or notify that a win will occur before the win is confirmed. In this case, since the winning type is advantageous, a combination (for example, ``7V7'') including a specific symbol (for example, a small symbol of ``7'') may be used as a special display result.

In the above embodiment, in the final variation of the special state, the small symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the middle of the variation display (for example, at the end of the preview production or when the production pattern is temporarily stopped), and the display result is notified. It had become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small symbols may be stopped and displayed at the end of the final variation of the special state, and the win notification or loss notification may be performed based on the presentation content or presentation pattern of the preview presentation.

In the above embodiment, in the special state final variation, the specific variable display includes the special state final variation and the variation display based on the second pending memory stored when the special state final variation is being executed. Relatedly, specific notifications such as win notification (display of win notice and winning symbols) and loss notification (display of loss notice and losing symbols) were performed. The display is not limited to the specific variable display or the special state final variation, and may be any other specific variation display. For example, the specific variable display may be a specific variable display in a time-saving state or a variable probability state (such as the final variation in a time-saving state or a variable probability state, a variable display before the end of a predetermined number of times, etc.), or a display of multiple types of production modes or background images. When there is a timer, it may be a variable display in which the production mode or background image changes, or when a timer is counted down, a variable display may be used when the timer times out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment enters the jackpot gaming state when the display result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot" and when a V prize is won in the small winning gaming state. A game machine that can be controlled, but can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state only when the display result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot" or a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state only when a V prize is won in a small winning gaming state. The present invention may be applied to gaming machines.

(Means related to characteristic part 100AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 100K is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 with a characteristic part 100AK) that can display identification information (for example, performance symbols, etc.) in a variable manner and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
a suspension storage means (for example, a second suspension storage buffer, etc.) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information;
A specific notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification (for example, a preview effect, a display result-based effect, a pseudo variable display, etc.) that informs that control is possible in the advantageous state (for example, a notice effect process in step AKS108, a display in step AKS110) a performance control CPU 101 that executes result-based performance processing, etc.);
A reduction variable display means (for example, the small pattern display area 9K of the performance display device 9) capable of variably displaying the reduced identification information (such as a small pattern) in a manner smaller than the identification information,
The specific notification execution means, in a specific variable display (for example, special state final change, etc.), corresponds to the specific variable display and the suspension information stored in the suspension storage means when the specific variable display is being executed. The specific notification can be performed in conjunction with the variable display,
When specific suspension information regarding a variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display and is controllable to the advantageous state is not stored in the suspension storage means, the specific variable display is controlled to the advantageous state. After the specified variable display is completed, a predetermined display result (for example, It is possible to derive the final stop symbol of a losing combination, etc.),
when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display, for notifying that control to the advantageous state is possible in the specific variable display; Execute specific notification, and display reduced identification information in the specific variable display and in the variable display based on suspension information different from the specific suspension information stored in the suspension storage means after the specific variable display ends. As a result, some of the reduced identification information that makes up the predetermined display result and special identification information (for example, a special small pattern indicating the letter V) that is not included in the reduced identification information that makes up the predetermined display result. The reduced identification information can be derived by the first pattern for deriving the special display result configured,
when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display, the specification for notifying that the specific variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state; The result of displaying the reduced identification information in the specific variable display and the variable display based on suspension information different from the specific suspension information stored in the suspension storage means after the specific variable display is completed. , reduced identification information can be derived by a second pattern for deriving the predetermined display result,
When the reduced identification information is derived according to the second pattern, it is possible to notify that the variable display based on the specific pending information will be controlled to the advantageous state in a manner different from the specific notification (for example, a relief effect). ,
In the specific variable display, the proportion of reduced identification information derived from the first pattern is higher than the proportion of reduced identification information derived from the second pattern (for example, in the variable pattern shown in FIG. 18-2(B) The rate of variation pattern PC1-3 being determined is higher than that of PC1-4).
According to such a configuration, when notifying that the vehicle will be controlled to an advantageous state in the variable display based on the specific reservation information, it is possible to prevent the fact that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state from being recognized in advance.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In connection with the execution of the specific notification for notifying that the specific variable display is controlled to the advantageous state, the special display result is derived as a display result of the reduced identification information (for example, in FIG. 5(A)).
According to such a configuration, since the display result of the reduced identification information is derived when the player is paying attention to the specific notification, it is possible to make it less noticeable that the display result of the reduced identification information has been derived.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
After the specific notification for notifying that the specific variable display is controlled to the advantageous state is executed, a predetermined effect using a predetermined image (for example, a winning response effect) can be executed,
In connection with the execution of the predetermined effect, the special display result may be derived as a display result of the reduced identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 18-5(B)).
According to such a configuration, since the display result of the reduced identification information is derived when the player is paying attention to the predetermined performance, it is possible to make it less noticeable that the display result of the reduced identification information has been derived.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
In the specific variable display, a first specific variable display pattern (eg, variable pattern PC1-3) whose variable display time is a first time, and a second specific variable display pattern whose variable display time is a second time longer than the first time. Variable display can be performed using either a variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PC1-4),
In the specific variable display, the second specific variable display pattern is more effective when the reduced identification information is derived from the second pattern than when the reduced identification information is derived from the first pattern. The execution rate may be high (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 18-3, 18-4(B), and 18-8 are executed based on the variation pattern PC1-4).
According to such a configuration, variable display can be performed with variable display time depending on the derivation pattern of the reduced identification information.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state between a second special figure jackpot and a jackpot X via small hit) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, a second jackpot game state of jackpot types other than special jackpot and jackpot via small hit X),
In the specific variable display, when reduced identification information is derived by the second pattern, the second advantageous state may be controlled based on the specific pending information (for example, as shown in FIG. 18-2(B)). good.
According to such a configuration, even though it is reported that the reduced identification information will be controlled to an advantageous state after the second pattern is derived, the interest caused by being controlled to an advantageous state with a lower degree of advantage can prevent a decline in

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
In the specific variable display, it is possible to execute a pseudo variable display that resumes after temporarily stopping the variable display of the identification symbol (for example, FIGS. 18-9 (A) and (B)),
It is possible to execute a preview performance (for example, a specific preview performance) when executing the pseudo variable display,
The execution rate of the preview performance is different between when the reduced identification information is derived by the first pattern and when the reduced identification information is derived by the second pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 18-9(C)). You can also do this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the reduced identification information is derived using the second pattern.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 93AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 93AK will be explained. In the characteristic portion 93AK, descriptions of parts (configuration, processing, etc.) common to the above embodiments (FIGS. 1 to 17) will be omitted.

In the feature section 100AK, it is possible to perform a pseudo variable display in which the variable display of performance symbols is temporarily stopped due to a losing combination in one variable display, and then resumed, and a variation pattern in which such a pseudo variable display is executed a predetermined number of times is possible. , and a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is executed a specific number of times more than a predetermined number of times. Further, as special states, there are provided a first special state and a second special state in which the period of the special state is longer than the first special state. Then, in the second special state, if it is a hit, a variable display of the performance symbols can be executed using a variable pattern that executes a pseudo variable display a specific time. Furthermore, if the first variable display after being controlled to the second special state is a loss, the decorative symbols are variable displayed using a variable pattern in which pseudo variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of successive hits in a short period of time, and to suppress an increase in the gambling quality.

Note that the pseudo variable display is similar to the pseudo continuous effect in that it makes one variable display appear to be pseudo variable display multiple times. However, in a pseudo-continuous performance, the expectation of winning generally increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases, whereas the pseudo-variable display of this embodiment simply displays one variable display in a pseudo-multiple manner. This is a production to make it look like a variable display of times.

FIG. 19-1 is an explanatory diagram showing the winning determination ratio of the characteristic portion 93AK. The ratio of determining the display result as a jackpot for the first special symbol (jackpot probability) is 1/199, and it is not determined as a small hit. Furthermore, the proportion of the second special symbol that determines the display result as a jackpot (jackpot probability) is 1/199, and the proportion that the display result is determined as a small hit (small win probability) is 1/5.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the probability that the display result of the second special symbol will be a small hit is as high as 1/5, it is easy to enter the second starting winning opening 14, and the second In a special state where a variable display of special symbols is likely to be executed, the probability of a small hit is high.

Note that the jackpot probability and small hit probability shown in Figure 19-1 are just examples, and any probability can be used as long as the probability of a hit (small hit) is high in a special state and the probability that a hit can occur with a small number of fluctuations. good. Further, in this embodiment, the display result of the first special symbol is designed to never result in a small hit, but the display result of the first special symbol may be a small win.

FIG. 19-2 shows the winning distribution of the feature section 93AK. As shown in FIG. 19-2(A), a first jackpot and a second jackpot are provided as the jackpot types of the symbol jackpot. In the first jackpot, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is 6 rounds, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the special state is controlled until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed once. In the second jackpot, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is 6, and the special state is controlled until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 99 times after the end of the jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 19-2 (A), when it is determined that the displayed result is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined to be the first jackpot at a rate of 99%, and the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot type at the second jackpot at a rate of 1%. Determined by type. Therefore, if a jackpot is achieved based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the normal state, after the end of the jackpot game state, the special state will continue until the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is performed once at a rate of 99%. controlled by. Then, in the special state, the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once in the special state, and fluctuating displays corresponding to up to four second reservation memories accumulated during the fluctuating display, a total of up to five times. In the variable display of the second special symbol, the player plays the game with the aim of winning the small win, which has a winning probability of 1/5 as described above.

Note that the distribution of jackpots (determination ratio of jackpot type) may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, as shown in Figure 19-2 (B), if the display result of the second special symbol in the special state is a small hit and a jackpot via the small hit, in the small hit game state and the jackpot game state. The total number of rounds is 7 rounds, and the special state is controlled until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed once after the end of the jackpot game state.

In the case where the display result of the second special symbol is a small hit in the normal state and a jackpot via the small win, the total number of rounds in the small win game state and the jackpot game state is 7 rounds, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is 7 rounds. After the end, the special state is controlled until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 99 times. A special state that ends after 99 fluctuations is also referred to as a second special state. Note that the case where the display result of the second special symbol in the normal state is a small hit is the case where the display result of the second special symbol is a small hit in the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state. If a small hit occurs in the maximum of four variable displays of the second reserved memory at the end of such a special state, the special state is controlled to be a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state. Since the probability that the display result of the second special symbol will be a small hit is 1/5, when the second special state is controlled, the next hit is almost confirmed. Note that in the characteristic section 93AK, the second pending memory at the end of the special state is also referred to as remaining pending memory.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot via a small hit, the small winning game state in which the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 opens is counted as one round, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in the second round and onwards. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot via small hit is actually a jackpot of 6 rounds.

In addition, in S163 of the jackpot end process of FIG. 11, the count initial value of the total time saving number counter according to the winning type is set, so that the special state according to the winning type is controlled.

FIG. 19-3 shows a list of variation patterns corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol in the feature section 93AK. When the variable display of the second special symbol is started, one of the variable patterns shown in FIG. 19-3 is determined. The variation pattern with variation pattern number 101 has a variation time of 2 s (seconds) and corresponds to a non-reach loss. The variation pattern with variation pattern number 102 has a variation time of 12 seconds and corresponds to a normal reach loss. The variation pattern with variation pattern number 103 has a variation time of 28 seconds and corresponds to a super reach loss. The variation pattern with variation pattern number 111 has a variation time of 8 seconds and corresponds to a non-reach loss after executing the pseudo variable display four times. The variation pattern with variation pattern number 112 has a variation time of 12 seconds, and corresponds to a reach failure after executing the pseudo variable display four times. The variation pattern with variation pattern number 113 has a variation time of 24 seconds and corresponds to a non-reach loss after executing the pseudo variable display 12 times. The variation pattern with variation pattern number 114 has a variation time of 28 seconds, and corresponds to a reach failure after executing the pseudo variable display 12 times.

The variation pattern with variation pattern number 202 has a variation time of 12 seconds and corresponds to a normal reach hit (direct hit). The variation pattern with variation pattern number 203 has a variation time of 28 seconds, which corresponds to a super reach hit. The variation pattern with variation pattern number 212 has a variation time of 12 seconds and corresponds to a win after executing the pseudo variable display four times. The variation pattern with variation pattern number 214 has a variation time of 28 seconds, which corresponds to a win after executing the pseudo variable display 12 times.

In this way, as a variation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, there is a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is not executed (normal variable display pattern), and a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is executed 4 times (predetermined times) (predetermined times). A pseudo variable display pattern) and a variable pattern (predetermined times pseudo variable display pattern) in which pseudo variable display is executed 12 times (specific times more than a predetermined number of times) are provided.

The list of fluctuation patterns shown in Figure 19-3 is just an example, and at least a normal variable display pattern, a predetermined times pseudo variable display pattern, and a specific times It is sufficient if a pseudo variable display pattern is provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the presence or absence of pseudo variable display and the number of times of pseudo variable display are determined according to the variation pattern, but based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined on the main board 31 side, the production control board 80 side The presence or absence of pseudo variable display and the number of times may be determined by. Moreover, when the display result is a loss, the production control board 80 may ultimately decide whether to make it a non-reach loss or a reach loss.

In this embodiment, the predetermined number of times was 4 times and the specific number of times was 12 times, but the specific number of times may be any other number of times as long as the number of specific times is greater than the predetermined number of times. Further, the number of pseudo variable displays in one variable display is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

FIG. 19-4 shows an example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. During the special state (first special state) that ends with one variation, and if there is a loss with 4 remaining pending variations, the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times as shown in Figure 19-4 (A). The variation pattern of pattern number 113 or variation pattern number 114 is determined at a rate of 50%, respectively.

During a special state (first special state) that ends with one variation, and when a win occurs with four remaining reservations, as shown in Figure 19-4 (B), a variation in which the pseudo variable display is executed four times. A 10% ratio is determined to pattern number 212, and a 90% ratio is determined to a fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern number 214 in which pseudo variable display is executed 12 times.

In this way, the variation pattern in the special state (first special state) that ends with one variation and in the remaining 4 pending variations is likely to be determined as a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display number is 12 times. In particular, when the display result is a loss, a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is always executed 12 times is determined. Thereby, even if the special state ends after only one change, the number of changes in the special state (first special state) can be made to appear pseudo-large.

If you lose in a special state (second special state) that ends with 99 fluctuations, as shown in Figure 19-4 (C), the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern will be determined by the number of fluctuations after entering the special state. It's different. If the first fluctuation of a special state (second special state) that ends with 99 fluctuations results in a loss, a 50% ratio will be applied to the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern number 111 or fluctuation pattern number 112, in which the pseudo variable display is executed 4 times. determined by

In this way, if the first variation of the second special state results in a loss, the pseudo variable display is determined to be a variation pattern that is executed four times, which reduces the possibility of successive wins occurring in a short period of time. This can suppress the increase in gambling tendencies. In addition, by determining a variation pattern in which pseudo variable display is executed four times, which is the same number as the upper limit of the number of second pending memories, it is possible to perform four variable displays based on the second pending memory. can be shown. Note that the number of pseudo variable displays in the predetermined times pseudo variable display pattern (predetermined times) is not limited to the same number as the upper limit number of the second pending memory number, and even if it is less than the second pending memory number, etc. good.

Furthermore, for example, if the second reserved memory number is the upper limit number at the start of the second special state, and the player stops shooting game balls after the second special state starts, If a pseudo variable display is executed a number of times greater than the upper limit of the second pending storage number in the variable display, the variation will be recognized as a pseudo variable display. Therefore, if the first variation of the second special state results in a loss, by determining a variation pattern in which pseudo variable display is executed four times, which is the same number as the upper limit of the number of second reserved memories, the second special state During the first fluctuation after the change, it can be made difficult to recognize that the display is a pseudo variable display.

In addition, if the first variation of the second special state results in a loss, by not using a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times, the variation time ( It is possible to prevent interest from decreasing due to recognition that the player is earning a variable number of times.

If a loss occurs in the second to fifth fluctuations of the special state (second special state) that ends with 99 fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern number 101 of non-reach loss and the fluctuation pattern numbers 111 to 114 in which pseudo variable display is executed. One of the patterns is determined. Here, the non-reach variation pattern number 101 may be determined at a rate of 10%, so the period at which one variation display ends can be made indefinite, and one variation display It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the display is a pseudo variable display or a pseudo variable display. In addition, in the case of a loss after 2 to 5 fluctuations, there is a high probability that a fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-variable display is executed 4 or 12 times will result in successive wins occurring in a short period of time. By reducing this, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling.

If the special state (second special state) that ends with 99 fluctuations results in a loss on the 6th fluctuation or later, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss fluctuation pattern number 101 will be determined at a rate of 95%, and at a rate of 4%. The variation pattern number 102 for normal reach loss is determined, and the variation pattern number 103 for non-reach is determined at a rate of 1%. As mentioned above, in the special state, the probability of getting a small hit is 1/5, and the probability of winning in fluctuations earlier than 6 times after entering the second special state is also high; Even if you do not win due to fluctuations up to the first round, there is a high probability that you will win soon thereafter. Therefore, from the 6th time onward after transitioning to the second special state, by determining a high proportion of the fluctuation pattern number 101, which has a short fluctuation time and is a non-reach loss, fluctuations can be digested at a high speed and a hit can occur at an early stage. This prevents the player from losing interest due to not winning for a long time despite the second special state.

For example, the section until the variation is executed five times in the second special state (until the fifth variation ends) is also referred to as the first section. Further, for example, the section after the sixth variation starts in the second special state (the section after the first section) is also referred to as the second section. In the second section, the proportion of pseudo-variable displays is lower than in the first section (0% in this example), so pseudo-variable displays occur frequently in the second section of the second special state, which reduces the interest of the game. This can be prevented from decreasing. Further, since the decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner using the normal variable display pattern in the first section, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the decorative pattern is a pseudo variable display.

Note that the separation between the first section and the second section in the second special state is not limited to before and after the end of the fifth fluctuation in the second special state, as in this embodiment; Any section after the first section may be sufficient. In this case, the first section may be any section (period) in which it is preferable to prevent the gambling experience from increasing due to successive hits after the second special state is controlled. The second section may be a section (period) after the end of the first section in the second differentiated state, and is such a section (period) that the gambling nature does not increase excessively even if the fluctuations are quickly digested. . Furthermore, the first section and the second section may be divided based on the actual elapsed time or the total number of pseudo-variable displays, rather than on the basis of the number of variable displays.

If you win in a special state that ends with 99 fluctuations (second special state), as shown in Figure 19-4 (D), the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern will be determined by the number of fluctuations after entering the special state. It's different. If the special state (second special state) that ends with 99 fluctuations becomes a hit on the first to fifth fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern number 202 that corresponds to the normal reach will be determined at a rate of 10%, and the pseudo variable display will be displayed 4 times. The variation pattern number 212 to be executed is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variation pattern number 214 for which pseudo variable display is executed 12 times is determined at a rate of 70%. If a win is achieved by the first to fifth fluctuations (first section) of the second special state, the pseudo variable display will be determined at a high rate by the fluctuation pattern that is executed 12 times, so the win will occur continuously in a short period of time. This can be reduced and the increase in gambling behavior can be suppressed. Note that a variation pattern may be determined in which the pseudo variable display is not executed when the first to fifth variation (first section) of the second special state results in a hit. Since there are cases where the pseudo variable display is not executed due to fluctuations and a normal reach hit (direct hit) occurs, the effects become more diverse and the interest of the picture is improved.

If the special state (second special state) that ends with 99 fluctuations becomes a hit on the 6th fluctuation or later, the fluctuation pattern will be determined at a rate of 20% to the fluctuation pattern number 202 that will be per normal reach, and will be a fluctuation pattern that will be per super reach. The number 203 is determined at a rate of 80%. In this way, if the 6th and subsequent fluctuations of the 2nd special state (2nd section) result in a win, the fluctuations from the first to 5th times (1st section) of the 2nd special state result in a loss, and the fluctuation time (pseudo variable display Since it is assumed that a sufficient amount of time has been obtained (number of times), only a variation pattern that does not perform pseudo variable display is determined. Note that it may be possible to determine a variation pattern for performing pseudo-variable display.

In addition, there is a case where the special state (second special state) ends with 99 fluctuations and a win occurs on the first to fifth fluctuations (first section), and a special state that ends with 99 fluctuations (second special state). The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern may be constant between the case where the winning occurs due to the fluctuation after the 6th time (second section), and the case where the fluctuation pattern is determined after the sixth time (second section).

The determined ratio shown in FIG. 19-4 is an example, and can be arbitrarily changed without departing from the spirit of the characteristic portion 93AK as long as the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. For example, in a special state (first special state) that ends with one variation, and in a case where there is a loss with four remaining holds (Figure 19-4 (A)), other than the variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times. may be determined. In addition, during the special state (first special state) that ends with one variation, and when there is a win with 4 remaining reservations (Figure 19-4 (B)), only the variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times. Alternatively, a variation pattern may be determined in which pseudo-variable display is not performed. Further, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern may be made different between the special state (first special state) that ends with one fluctuation and the subsequent four remaining reservations.

If the first variation of a special state (second special state) that ends with 99 variations results in a loss (Figure 19-4 (C)), a variation pattern other than the one in which the pseudo variable display is executed 4 times may be determined. It may be set as such. If the second to fifth fluctuations of a special state (second special state) that ends with 99 fluctuations result in a loss, a fluctuation pattern may be determined that results in a reach loss. If the special state (second special state) that ends after 99 variations results in a loss at the 6th variation or later, a variation pattern may be determined in which pseudo-variable display is executed.

If the special state (second special state) fluctuation ends with 99 fluctuations and results in a win (Figure 19-4 (D)), a fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo variable display is always executed (for example, a pseudo variable display is executed 12 times) (variation pattern) may be determined. If the special state (second special state) that ends after 99 variations results in a win on the 6th variation or later, a variation pattern may be determined in which a pseudo-variable display is executed.

FIG. 19-5 is a timing chart showing an example of a fluctuating display after the special state is controlled. Figure 19-5 (A) is a fluctuation table when the special state is controlled to end with one fluctuation (first special state), and the display results of the special state fluctuation display and remaining pending fluctuation display are all loses. An example is given. When the jackpot game state ends and the control is controlled to the first special state, if the display result is a loss, the first variable display is determined to be a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times (Figure 19- 4(A)). When the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern ends, the special state ends. After that, four variable displays are executed based on the remaining hold (hold 1 to 4), but if the display result is a loss, a variable pattern in which pseudo variable display is executed 12 times in each variable display is used. determined (see Figure 19-4(A)). When the four fluctuating displays based on the remaining balance end, the situation in which the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed ends, and the consecutive winnings in which the jackpot continues during the special state also end.

In this way, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the control is controlled to the first special state, the special state actually ends with one fluctuating display, but the display results of the fluctuating display in the first special state and remaining pending If all of them are loses, the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times, resulting in a total of 5 consecutive variable displays. Therefore, it can be made to appear as if the variable display has been executed 60 times, and the control period for the special state can be made to appear to be longer. Furthermore, it is possible to show a large number of fluctuations in the special state.

Figure 19-5 (B) shows that the display is controlled to a special state (second special state) that ends after 99 fluctuations, and the display result of the third fluctuation display after being controlled to the special state is a win (small win). This shows an example of the fluctuation display when the When the jackpot game state ends and the control is controlled to the second special state, if the display result is a loss, the first variable display is determined to be a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is executed four times (Figure 19- (See 4(C)). When the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern is finished and the display result of the second fluctuation display is a loss under the control of the second special state, a fluctuation pattern in which a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern or a pseudo variable display is executed is determined. (See Figure 19-4(C)). Here, a non-reach-loss variation pattern is determined, and a variation display based on the variation pattern is executed. Then, if the display result of the third variable display under the control of the second special state is a hit, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach hit or a variation pattern in which a pseudo variable display is executed (Figure 19-4 ( See D). Here, a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times is determined, a variation display based on the variation pattern is executed, and the display result becomes a win.

In this way, even if the jackpot gaming state ends and the control is changed to the second special state, and the display result becomes a win at an early stage (for example, the number of fluctuations is less than the expected value assumed from the jackpot probability or small win probability). , If the first variation of the second special state results in a loss, a variation pattern in which the pseudo-variable display is always executed four times is determined, which reduces the possibility of successive wins occurring in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress the increase in gambling. In addition, if the 2nd to 5th fluctuation results in a loss, a non-reach fluctuation pattern may be determined, so the period at which one fluctuation display ends can be indefinite, and one fluctuation display It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the display is a pseudo-variable display or a pseudo-variable display. In addition, if the 2nd to 5th fluctuation results in a loss, there is a high probability that the pseudo variable display is determined to be a fluctuation pattern that is executed 4 or 12 times, and if the pseudo variable display results in a win within 5 fluctuations, the pseudo variable display Since there is a high probability that the variable pattern is determined to be executed 12 times, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of successive hits in a short period of time and to suppress an increase in the gambling quality.

Figure 19-5 (C) shows that the display is controlled to a special state (second special state) that ends after 99 fluctuations, and the display result of the 10th fluctuation display after being controlled to the special state is a hit (small win). This shows an example of the fluctuation display when the When the jackpot game state ends and the control is controlled to the second special state, if the display result is a loss, the first variable display is determined to be a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is executed four times (Figure 19- (See 4(C)). When the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern is finished and the display results of the second to fifth fluctuation displays are lost under control of the second special state, a fluctuation pattern in which a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern or a pseudo variable display is executed. (See Figure 19-4(C)). Here, in the second to fifth variation displays, a variation pattern in which pseudo variable display is executed 12 times, a variation pattern with non-reach loss, a variation pattern in which pseudo variable display is executed 12 times, and a variation pattern in which pseudo variable display is executed 4 times. A fluctuation pattern is determined, and a fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern is executed. If the display result of the sixth and subsequent variable displays under the control of the second special state is a failure, a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is not executed is determined (see FIG. 19-4(C)). Here, in the 6th to 9th variation display, a non-reach-loss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, and each variation is digested at high speed. Then, if the display result of the 10th variable display under the control of the second special state is a hit, a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is not executed is determined (see FIG. 19-4 (D)). Here, a variation pattern is determined in which super reach is executed, a variation display based on the variation pattern is executed, and the display result becomes a win.

In this way, if the jackpot gaming state ends and the control is changed to the second special state, and the display result becomes a win at a late stage (for example, the number of fluctuations is greater than the expected value assumed from the jackpot probability or small win probability), the second special state is controlled. In the second section (the sixth and subsequent variable displays under the control of the second special state), the proportion of pseudo variable display execution is higher than in the first section (the fifth variable display under the control of the second special state). Since it is low (0% in this embodiment), it is possible to prevent the pseudo-variable display from occurring frequently in the second section of the second special state and from losing the interest of the game due to few hits. Further, since the variable display can be executed using a variation pattern in which the pseudo variable display is not executed in the first section, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the pseudo variable display is being performed.

Figure 19-6 shows a case where the display is controlled to a special state (second special state) that ends after 99 fluctuations, and the display result of the third fluctuation display after being controlled to the special state is a hit (small win). A display example on the effect display device 9 in the case of FIG. 19-5(B) is shown. FIG. 19-6 (1) shows that the jackpot game state has ended and the special state has started. In addition, the effect display device 9 displays a message that a special state is starting, a right-handed drive promotion notification effect image is displayed in the right-handed display area 9Z, and a variable display of small symbols begins in the small symbol display area 9K. has been done. In FIG. 19-6, the state in which variations in the performance symbols and small symbols are being executed in the performance symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R and the small symbol display area 9K is indicated by downward arrows.

In the first variation display in the special state (second special state), if the variation pattern with the variation pattern number 111 in which the pseudo variable display is executed four times is determined, the variation pattern shown in FIGS. 19-6 (1) to (9) As shown in FIG. 3, a variable display in which pseudo variable display is executed four times is executed. In Figures 19-6 (3), (5), and (7), the performance symbols of losing combinations temporarily stop, and in Figure 19-6 (9), the initial fluctuation display in the special state (second special state) The performance symbols of the non-reach losing combination that are the display result are stopped and displayed (determined and stopped). In addition, the small symbols of non-reach losing combinations are also stopped and displayed (determined stop). The combination of effect symbols to be temporarily stopped in each pseudo-variable display may be determined at the start of variation. Here, the performance symbols that will result in a reach-loss combination at the second temporary stop shown in FIG. 19-6 (5) are determined.

For example, by providing a plurality of pseudo variable display patterns associated with scenarios of combinations of performance symbols that are temporarily stopped each time the pseudo variable display is performed, and determining the pseudo variable display pattern at the start of the variation accompanied by the pseudo variable display, What is necessary is to decide the combination of effect symbols to be temporarily stopped each time. Note that the combination of performance symbols to be temporarily stopped each time the pseudo variable display is performed may be determined separately each time the temporary stop is made.

In the second variation display in the special state (second special state), if the variation pattern with the non-reach variation pattern number 101 is determined, as shown in FIGS. 19-6 (10) and (11), The variable display is started, and the performance symbols of non-reach losing combinations are stopped and displayed (determined stop). In addition, the small symbols of non-reach losing combinations are also stopped and displayed (determined stop).

In the second fluctuation display in the special state (second special state), if the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times and the winning fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern number 214, as shown in FIG. 19-6 (12) As shown in (24), a variable display in which pseudo variable display is executed 12 times is executed. Note that FIG. 19-6 shows pseudo-variable displays on the 1st to 3rd days and the 10th to 12th times. In FIGS. 19-6 (13), (15), and (17), the performance symbols of non-reach losing combinations are temporarily stopped. In addition, in Figures 19-6 (18), (20), and (22), the left symbol and the middle symbol have the same number, and the right symbol is shifted by one position, resulting in a chance, and the performance symbol of the losing combination is temporarily stopped. ing. By continuously stopping such chances, it is possible to suggest that you will win. Then, in FIG. 19-6 (24), the production symbols of the winning combination are stopped and displayed (determined and stopped). In addition, the small symbols of the winning combination are also stopped and displayed (determined and stopped).

As shown in FIG. 19-6, although there are actually three variable displays, the pseudo variable display can make it appear as if more variable displays have been executed than actually. In addition, even if you win at a relatively early stage, such as the third variable display after being controlled by the special state, by executing multiple pseudo variable displays as shown in Figure 19-6, you can It is possible to reduce the occurrence of successive hits in between, and to suppress an increase in the gambling nature. In addition, since the second fluctuation is a fluctuating display that does not perform a pseudo variable display, the period at which one fluctuating display ends can be indefinite, and whether it is a single fluctuating display or a pseudo variable display. It can be made difficult to recognize that it is a display.

In FIG. 19-6, the small symbols continue to fluctuate when the performance symbols are temporarily stopped, but the small symbols may also be temporarily stopped.

In this embodiment, in the variable display corresponding to the special state or remaining reservation, a variable pattern is determined to execute pseudo variable display 4 times or 12 times, so that the period in the special state appears longer or the special It was possible to show a large number of changes in the state, and it was possible to reduce the occurrence of successive hits in a short period of time. The present invention is not limited to this, and in a specific variable display in a special state, the pseudo variable display may be performed a special number of times, for example, more than 4 times or 12 times. For example, as shown in Figure 19-7, in the final variation in a special state (in the first special state that ends with one variation, it is also the first variation), the pseudo variable display is displayed for the special number of times (for example, 50 times, 99 times, etc.). ) may be executed. In this way, by performing a pseudo-variable display of the special number of times in a specific fluctuation display in a special state, it is possible to make the period of the special state appear longer or to make the number of fluctuations in the special state appear larger. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of consecutive hits. Then, in the other fluctuation displays in the special state and the fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining hold, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (for example, the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern number 101 of non-reach loss) is selected, so that fluctuations can be performed at high speed. You may also allow it to be digested. In the example shown in FIG. 19-7, a variable display is performed using a variable pattern with a short variation time in remaining reservations. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the number of pseudo variable displays in the special state from becoming too large and the period from the start of the special state to the expiration of the remaining reservation from becoming too long.

FIG. 19-8 shows a pseudo variable display pattern corresponding to a combination of effect symbols to be temporarily stopped in a variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed four times. As shown in FIG. 19-8, in the pseudo-variable display, non-reach loss, reach loss, or chance combinations are temporarily stopped as loss combinations of performance symbols. In this embodiment, the chance eye is a combination of performance symbols in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same number, and the right symbol is shifted by one, as shown in FIG. 19-9. Note that the chance may be any combination of predetermined effect symbols, and is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 19-9.

As shown in Figure 19-8, the pseudo variable display patterns FPA0-1 to FPA0-2 (temporary stop with 0 reach losses), FPA1-1 to FPA1, depending on the losing combination of the performance symbols in the first to third temporary stops. -3 (Temporary stop after 1 miss in reach), FPA2-1 to FPA2-2 (Temporary stop after 2 misses in reach), and FPA3-1 (Temporary stop after 3 misses in reach). The pseudo variable display pattern FPA0-2 is a pseudo variable display pattern in which the chance roll temporarily stops three times. It should be noted that there may be pseudo variable display patterns other than these (losing combinations of performance symbols in the first to third temporary stops).

FIG. 19-10 shows an example of the determination ratio of the pseudo variable display pattern in the variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed four times. FIG. 19-10(A) shows the determination ratio when the remaining reservation does not include reservation information corresponding to a hit. FIG. 19-10(B) shows the determination ratio when the remaining reservations include reservation information corresponding to a win. As shown in FIGS. 19-10 (A) and (B), the determination ratio of the pseudo variable display pattern differs depending on whether the display result of the fluctuation is a non-reach loss, a reach loss, or a hit. When the pseudo variable display pattern FPA1 (temporary stop once reach loss) shown in FIG. 19-10 is determined, one of the pseudo variable display patterns FPA1-1 to FPA1-3 is further determined. Further, when the pseudo variable display pattern (temporary stop after two reach losses) is determined, one of the pseudo variable display patterns FPA2-1 to FPA2-2 is determined. In this case, the determination ratio may be varied based on the display results and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 19-10 (A) and (B), when the display result is a win, the reach-loss combination is more likely to be temporarily stopped than when it is a reach-loss or non-reach loss. Moreover, when the display result is a reach loss, the reach-loss combination is more likely to be temporarily stopped than when the display result is a non-reach loss. As a result, it is possible to suggest that it is likely to be a hit or that it is likely to become a reach after that, depending on the combination of performance symbols that are temporarily stopped (the frequency at which reach-loss combinations are stopped and displayed).

In addition, the pseudo variable display pattern FPA0-2 in which the chance is temporarily stopped three times in a row is not selected when the display result is a non-reach loss, but is more likely to be selected when the display result is a win. . As a result, when the chance is displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped) three times in a row, it is confirmed that it will become a reach after that, and it is possible to foretell and suggest that the probability of winning is high. In addition, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming inconsistent due to a non-reach even though the chances have been three times in a row.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-10 (A) and (B), if the remaining reservation includes reservation information that corresponds to a win, the reservation that corresponds to a win in the remaining reservation It is more likely to be temporarily suspended for reach/loss combinations than when no information is included. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the combination of performance symbols that are temporarily stopped (the frequency with which reach-loss combinations are stopped and displayed) is likely to lead to a hit in the subsequent variable display corresponding to the remaining hold, and pseudo-variable It is possible to suitably generate reach in display. Specifically, if the remaining reservations include pending information that corresponds to a win, by increasing the frequency with which the reach-loss combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suggest that the reach-loss combination is closer to winning. can.

In addition, if the remaining hold contains hold information that corresponds to a win, the reach-loss combination will be suspended more than when the hold information that corresponds to a win is not included in the remaining hold. You can make it harder. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect in which the game suddenly becomes a hit in a state where the game is frequently out of reach, thereby increasing the interest. In addition, by increasing the frequency of reaching losses when the remaining reservations do not include reservation information corresponding to a win, the player's expectations can be increased even when the player does not actually win.

FIG. 19-11 shows a pseudo variable display pattern corresponding to a combination of effect symbols to be temporarily stopped in a variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times. As shown in FIG. 19-11, in the pseudo-variable display, non-reach loss, reach loss, or chance combinations are temporarily stopped as loss combinations of performance symbols. As shown in Figure 19-11, the pseudo variable display patterns FPB0-1 (Temporary stop with 0 reach losses), FPB1-1 to FPB1-2 (Temporary stop with 0 reach losses), FPB1-1 to FPB1-2 (Temporary stop with 0 reach losses), and (Temporary stop once), FPB5-21 (Temporary stop five times due to reach loss), etc. Note that FIG. 19-11 shows some of the pseudo variable display patterns out of all the pseudo variable display patterns for the sake of explanation. Note that the combination of losses that temporarily stops each time may be arbitrary, but as shown in the pseudo variable display pattern FPB3-41 shown in Figure 19-11, after three consecutive chance rolls, it is necessary to avoid following the combination of non-reach losses. Bye.

FIG. 19-12 shows an example of the determination ratio of the pseudo variable display pattern in the variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times. In addition, in FIGS. 19-12, the determination ratio of some pseudo variable display patterns among all pseudo variable display patterns is shown for explanation. Even in the determination ratio of the pseudo-variable display pattern in the variable display where the pseudo-variable display is executed 12 times, when the display result is a hit, the reach-loss combination is more likely to be temporarily stopped than when it is a reach-loss or non-reach loss. All you have to do is stay there. Moreover, when the display result is a reach loss, it is sufficient that the temporary stop is more likely to occur for a larger number of reach loss combinations than when the display result is a reach loss non-reach result. As a result, it is possible to suggest that it is likely to be a hit or that it is likely to become a reach after that, depending on the combination of performance symbols that are temporarily stopped (the frequency at which reach-loss combinations are stopped and displayed).

In addition, even in a variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times, the pseudo variable display pattern FPB0-30 in which the chance eye is temporarily stopped in three consecutive temporary stops before the end of the variation, the display result is a non-reach loss. If the displayed result is a hit, it is likely to be selected. As a result, when the chance is displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped) three times in a row, it is confirmed that it will become a reach after that, and it is possible to foretell and suggest that the probability of winning is high. In addition, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming inconsistent due to a non-reach even though the chances have been three times in a row.

It should be noted that such a preview performance that stops the chance eye may be executed other than the pseudo variable display. For example, a pre-reading preview performance may be executed that increases the expectation level of jackpot or the rate of occurrence of reach after a chance is stopped in a plurality of variable displays. For example, in a pre-read preview performance, if the chance roll stops three times in a row, the reach may be determined.

In addition, even in the variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed 12 times, the determination ratio of the pseudo variable display is varied depending on whether or not the remaining pending information includes reservation information corresponding to a win. Good too. In this case, it is only necessary that the temporary suspension is more likely to occur with a larger number of reach-loss combinations than in the case where the remaining reservation does not include reservation information corresponding to a win. Thereby, depending on the combination of performance symbols that are temporarily stopped (the frequency at which reach-loss combinations are stopped and displayed), it can be suggested that a win is likely to occur in the subsequent variable display corresponding to the remaining hold.

Note that the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 19-10 and 19-12 are merely examples, and other determination ratios may be used. For example, if the display result is a win, the number of temporary stops for the reach/loss combination may be small, or the determination ratio may be constant regardless of the display result. In addition, in the variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed four times (Figure 19-10), the determination ratio of the pseudo variable display pattern is determined regardless of whether or not the pending information corresponding to a win is included in the pending display. may be constant.

FIG. 19-13 is a flowchart showing the variation effect control pattern setting process executed in the effect pattern variation start process (S801) of FIG. 16 in the feature section 93AK. The variable effect control pattern setting process includes a process for determining a pseudo variable display pattern when the variable pattern is to execute a pseudo variable display. In the variation production control pattern setting process, the production control CPU 101 determines whether the current variation is a variation corresponding to the second special symbol by determining whether or not the second symbol variation designation command is received. (93AKS01).

If the fluctuation corresponds to the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is the fluctuation pattern that executes the pseudo variable display (the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 111 to 114, 212, and 214 shown in Figure 19-3). ) (93AKS02). If the variation corresponds to the first special symbol or if the variation pattern does not perform a pseudo variable display, select a production control pattern to execute the production corresponding to the variation pattern (93AKS05), and The production control pattern setting process ends.

In the case of a variation pattern that executes a pseudo variable display, the pseudo variable display pattern is executed at the determined ratio shown in Figures 19-10 and 19-12 based on the variation pattern (display result) and whether there is a hit on the remaining reservation, etc. (93AKS03). Then, a performance control pattern for executing a performance (pseudo variable display) corresponding to the determined pseudo variable display pattern is selected (93AKS04), and the variable performance control pattern setting process is ended.

(Modified example of characteristic part 93AK)
This feature section is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The processing contents, determination ratios, and methods for determining various effects in the flowcharts shown in the above embodiments and modified examples are merely examples, and the effects similar to those in the above embodiments can be achieved, and the effects shown in the above embodiments can be Any method may be used as long as it can be executed suitably. Further, the performance operation examples shown in the above embodiments are merely examples, and can be modified as appropriate as long as the same performance effects can be achieved. Moreover, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Further, this characteristic part and other characteristic parts may be combined as appropriate.

In the feature section 93AK, the winning type may be notified based on the type of winning combination. For example, when controlled to a special state (second special state) that ends with 99 fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game state, the winning combination of "777" is stopped and displayed as a result of the display of production symbols and small symbols, and the jackpot is When controlled to a special state (first special state) that ends with one change after the end of the game state, the display of production symbols and small symbols will display winning combinations other than "777" (for example, "444", etc.). The display may be stopped. In this case, a promotion effect may be performed to encourage whether or not to promote a winning combination other than "777" to a winning combination of "777".

Furthermore, when a win occurs, the winning combination may be changed depending on whether or not the second holding memory stores holding information corresponding to the winning. For example, even if the current win is a win type that is controlled by a special state (first special state) that ends with one fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game state, the reservation corresponding to the win is stored in the second reservation memory. If the information is stored, the winning combination "777" (the winning combination corresponding to the winning type controlled by the special state (second special state)) may be stopped and displayed as the display result. . When controlled to the second special state after the end of the jackpot game state, there is a high possibility of winning again (continuously) during the second special state, so as a result of the display, the winning combination of "777" is stopped. What is said is essentially a notification of a series of events. Even if the game is controlled to the first special state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the pending information corresponding to the actual winning is stored, and if the consecutive winnings are confirmed, the displayed result will be By stopping and displaying the winning combination of "777", it is possible to make the player think that it is an advantageous winning type, and it is possible to increase the interest. Furthermore, the frequency of occurrence of advantageous winning types (or the frequency of successive winnings) can be shown to be higher than it actually is, and the interest can be improved.

In the feature section 93AK, by temporarily stopping the chance roll in multiple pseudo-variable displays, it is possible to execute a continuous performance that foretells that it will be a reach or a hit, but by temporarily stopping the chance roll. Instead of the continuous performance, another continuous performance may be performed over a plurality of pseudo variable displays. When executing a continuous effect over multiple pseudo-variable displays, the continuous effect may not be completed during the predetermined period just before the end of the variable display during which the pseudo-variable display is executed. It may be restricted. Note that, during a predetermined period just before the end of the variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed, continuous effects that temporarily stop the chance rolls in a plurality of pseudo variable displays may also be restricted. By doing so, continuous effects can be suitably executed.

In the above example, if the display result of the second special symbol is a small hit and it becomes a jackpot via a small hit, then depending on whether the state is special or normal when the small hit occurs, The period of the controlled special state (the number of variable displays that can be executed in the special state) was different. In this way, when a small hit occurs, the period of the special state (the number of fluctuation displays that can be executed in the special state) is not limited to differing depending on the state; It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of small winnings with different numbers of variable displays, and to determine one of the small winning types when the display result of the second special symbol is a small winning. For example, the number of variable displays that can be performed in a special state after a jackpot via a small win may be 0 times (no special state), 1 time, and 99 times.

The above feature parts 89AK to 92AK and 100AK may be incorporated into this feature part. For example, the stop control of the small symbols related to the feature portions 89AK and 100AK may be executed in the feature portion 93AK.

For example, as described in feature 100AK,
In a specific variable display (for example, special state final change, etc.), it corresponds to the specific variable display and the pending information stored in the pending storage means (for example, the second pending storage buffer, etc.) when the specific variable display is being executed. It is possible to perform specific notifications (for example, a preview performance, a display result corresponding performance, a pseudo variable display, etc.) in relation to the variable display that has been performed,
When the specific variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state (such as a jackpot gaming state) based on the specific variable display and the specific pending information regarding the variable display that can be controlled to the advantageous state is not stored in the pending storage means, the specific variable display is set to an advantageous state. A specific notification is executed to notify that the control is not performed, and a predetermined display is performed as a display result of reduced identification information (for example, a small pattern) in a variable display based on the suspension information stored in the suspension storage means after the specific variable display ends. It is possible to derive the result (for example, the final stop symbol of a losing combination),
When the control to the advantageous state is not performed based on the specific variable display and the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, a specific notification is executed to notify that the control to the advantageous state is possible in the specific variable display, and A predetermined display result is configured as a display result of the reduced identification information in the specific variable display and the variable display based on suspension information different from the specific suspension information stored in the suspension storage means after the specific variable display is completed. A first step for deriving a special display result consisting of some reduced identification information and special identification information (for example, a special small pattern indicating the letter V) that is not included in the reduced identification information that constitutes a predetermined display result. Reduced identification information can be derived from patterns,
When the specific variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state and the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means, a specific notification is executed to notify that the specific variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state, and the specified Deriving a predetermined display result as a display result of the reduced identification information in the variable display and the variable display based on suspension information different from the specific suspension information stored in the suspension storage means after the specific variable display is completed. It is possible to derive reduced identification information using two patterns,
When the reduced identification information is derived according to the second pattern, it is possible to notify in a manner different from the specific notification (for example, relief effect) that the variable display based on the specific pending information will be controlled to an advantageous state,
In specific variable display, the proportion of reduced identification information derived from the first pattern is higher than the proportion of reduced identification information derived from the second pattern (for example, in FIG. 18-2(B), variable pattern PC1-4 (the proportion determined to be the variation pattern PC1-3 is higher than that of the variation pattern PC1-3).
According to such a configuration, when notifying that the vehicle will be controlled to an advantageous state in the variable display based on the specific reservation information, it is possible to prevent the fact that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state from being recognized in advance.

In addition, as described in feature section 89AK,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, in the case of the first special jackpot C or a jackpot controlled by a special state that ends with one fluctuation) and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. 2nd advantageous state (for example, 1st special pattern jackpot A, 1st special pattern jackpot B, 2nd special pattern jackpot, any of the jackpots X to Z via small hit, or control to a special state that ends after 99 fluctuations) (such as in the case of a jackpot) and,
When controlled to the second advantageous state, as a display result of identification information, a specific display result consisting only of specific identification information (for example, red 7 effect symbol and small symbol, gold 7 effect symbol and small symbol, etc.) Derive
The reduced identification information different from the special identification information constituting the special display result may include predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information.
According to such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(Means related to characteristic part 93AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature section 93K is:
A gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 93AK) that can play a game and be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a variable display of the first special symbol;
A second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display 8b) that performs a variable display of the second special symbol;
Decorative variable display means (for example, performance display device 9) that performs variable display of decorative designs (for example, performance designs) in response to the variable display of the first special design or the second special design;
A special control means (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the process of S165) capable of controlling the special state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
A predetermined state (for example, a small win game state) in which the game medium can pass through a specific area (for example, the V winning area 870) based on the display result of the second variable display means being a specific result (for example, a small win symbol). control to the advantageous state based on the game medium passing through the specific area in the predetermined state;
The special control means selects, as the special states, a first special state (for example, a special state that ends after one change) and a second special state in which the period of the special state is longer than the first special state (for example, 99 times). (a special state that ends with fluctuation), and can be controlled to either
The decorative variable display means is
It is possible to perform a pseudo variable display that resumes after temporarily stopping the variable display of decorative patterns,
A normal variable display pattern in which the pseudo variable display is not executed (for example, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 101, 102, 103, 202, and 203), and a predetermined number of pseudo variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). pattern (for example, a variation pattern with variation pattern numbers 111, 112, 212), and a specific time pseudo variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern numbers 113, 114) in which the pseudo variable display is executed specific times (for example, 12 times) more than the predetermined number of times. , 214 variation patterns), it is possible to perform a variable display of the decorative pattern,
In the second special state, when the display result of the second variable display means becomes the specific result, it is possible to perform variable display of the decorative pattern using the specific time pseudo variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-4 (D) )),
In the first variable display after being controlled to the second special state, if the display result of the second variable display means is a loss result, the decorative pattern is variablely displayed using the pseudo variable display pattern for the predetermined number of times (e.g. Figure 19-4(C)).
According to such a configuration, the first special state can be made to appear for a long time by the pseudo-variable display, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the gambling quality by being controlled to an advantageous state immediately after the advantageous state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the display result of the second variable display means is the losing result in the first variable display after being controlled to the first special state, the decoration variable display means displays the decoration according to the specific time pseudo variable display pattern. The symbols may be displayed variably (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-4(A)).
According to such a configuration, pseudo variable display can be suitably executed in the first special state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the display result of the second variable display means becomes the specific result in the first variable display after being controlled to the second special state, the decoration variable display means displays the normal variable display pattern or the predetermined number of times. It is possible to perform variable display of the decorative pattern using the pseudo variable display pattern, and the proportion of variable display of the decorative pattern using the predetermined number of pseudo variable display patterns is higher than that of the normal variable display pattern (for example, FIG. 19-4 (D)). ).
According to such a configuration, the variations in presentation are diverse and the interest is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The predetermined number of times may be the same as the upper limit number (for example, four times) of variable display of the second special symbol that can be held.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display is being performed based on the suspension.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
When the decorative variable display means temporarily stops the variable display in the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the specific time pseudo variable display pattern, depending on whether or not the variable display whose display result is the specific result is on hold. The rate at which a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped may be varied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-10).
According to such a configuration, a predetermined decorative pattern can be suitably temporarily stopped.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
It is possible to execute a continuous effect (for example, a effect that continuously stops the chance roll) in the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the pseudo variable display pattern for the specific times, and the execution of the continuous effect is restricted for a predetermined period before the end of the variable display. (For example, in FIGS. 19-10 and 19-11, the chance position is not determined to be a pseudo variable display pattern in which the display temporarily stops three times in a row).
According to such a configuration, continuous effects can be suitably executed.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that displays identification information (for example, performance symbols, etc.) in a variable manner and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
a suspension storage means (for example, a second suspension storage buffer, etc.) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information;
Specific notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification (for example, a preview effect, a display result corresponding effect, etc.) that informs whether or not the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, a preview effect processing in step AKS108, a display result corresponding effect in step AKS110) a production control CPU 101 that executes processing, etc.);
A reduction variable display means (for example, the small pattern display area 9K of the performance display device 9) capable of variably displaying the reduced identification information (such as a small pattern) in a manner smaller than the identification information,
The specific notification execution means, in the specific variable display, performs the above-mentioned information in relation to the specific variable display and the variable display corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension storage means when the specific variable display is executed. It is possible to carry out specific notification,
When specific suspension information regarding a variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display but is controlled to the advantageous state is not stored in the suspension storage means, the specific variable display is controlled to the advantageous state. After the specified variable display is completed, a predetermined display result (for example, It is possible to derive the final stop symbol of a losing combination, etc.),
when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display, for notifying that the specific variable display will control the advantageous state; After executing the specific notification and completing the specific variable display, the predetermined display result is displayed as a display result of the reduced identification information in a variable display based on suspension information different from the specific suspension information stored in the suspension storage means. It is possible to derive a special display result consisting of some of the reduced identification information and special identification information that is not included in the reduced identification information that forms the predetermined display result, and a variable display based on the specific pending information. It is possible to notify that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state in a manner different from the specific notification,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, the case of the first special figure jackpot C) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, the case of the first special figure jackpot A, the first Special drawing jackpot B, 2nd special drawing jackpot, any of the jackpots X to Z via small hit, etc.),
When controlled to the second advantageous state, as a display result of the identification information, a specific display consisting only of specific identification information (for example, a red 7 production symbol and a small symbol, a gold 7 production symbol and a small symbol, etc.) derive the results,
The reduced identification information different from the special identification information constituting the special display result may include predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information.
According to such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(Means related to characteristic part 94AK)
Further, the characteristic portion 93AK includes a characteristic portion 94AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature section 94K is:
A gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 94AK) that can play a game and be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a variable display of the first special symbol;
A second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display 8b) that performs a variable display of the second special symbol;
Decorative variable display means (for example, performance display device 9) that performs variable display of decorative designs (for example, performance designs) in response to the variable display of the first special design or the second special design;
A special control means (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the process of S165) capable of controlling the special state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
A predetermined state (for example, a small win game state) in which the game medium can pass through a specific area (for example, the V winning area 870) based on the display result of the second variable display means being a specific result (for example, a small win symbol). control to the advantageous state based on the game medium passing through the specific area in the predetermined state;
The special control means selects, as the special states, a first special state (for example, a special state that ends after one change) and a second special state in which the period of the special state is longer than the first special state (for example, 99 times). (a special state that ends with fluctuation), and can be controlled to either
The decorative variable display means is
It is possible to perform a pseudo variable display that resumes after temporarily stopping the variable display of decorative patterns,
A normal variable display pattern in which the pseudo variable display is not executed (for example, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 101, 102, 103, 202, and 203), and a predetermined number of pseudo variable display in which the pseudo variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). pattern (for example, a variation pattern with variation pattern numbers 111, 112, 212), and a specific time pseudo variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern numbers 113, 114) in which the pseudo variable display is executed specific times (for example, 12 times) more than the predetermined number of times. , 214 variation patterns), it is possible to perform a variable display of the decorative pattern,
In the second special state, when the display result of the second variable display means becomes the specific result, it is possible to perform variable display of the decorative pattern using the specific time pseudo variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-4 (D) )),
The second special state includes a first section (for example, the section until the end of the fifth fluctuation) and a second section after the first section (for example, the section after the start of the sixth fluctuation). and,
The decorative variable display means is
In the second section, the ratio of performing the pseudo variable display is lower than in the first section (for example, FIGS. 19-4(C) and (D)),
In the first section, decorative patterns can be displayed variably using the normal variable display pattern (for example, FIGS. 19-4(C) and 19-4(D)).
According to such a configuration, the first special state can be made to appear longer by the pseudo-variable display, and it is possible to prevent the pseudo-variable display from occurring frequently in the second section of the second special state and reducing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 94K may include means (2) to (7) of the feature section 93AK.

1... Pachinko gaming machine 8a... First special symbol display device 8b... Second special symbol display device 9... Production display device 31... Main board 80... Production control board 100... Production control microcomputer 101... Production control CPU
560... Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that displays identification information variably and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a retention storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as retention information;
Specific notification execution means capable of executing specific notification to notify that control is possible in the advantageous state;
Reduction variable display means capable of variably displaying the reduced identification information in a manner smaller than the identification information ;
The suspension information includes specific suspension information regarding a variable display that can be controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific notification execution means is
In a specific variable display that is a variable display of identification information at a specific timing, when the specific variable display enables control to the advantageous state, and when the variable display corresponds to the suspension information stored in the suspension storage means. The specific notification can be executed in the case where the control becomes possible in the advantageous state,
executing the specific notification in the specific variable display when the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display;
The variable reduction display means is
When the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display, reduction identification is performed in connection with the execution of the specific notification in the specific variable display. information can be derived,
When the specific suspension information is stored in the suspension storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display, the display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information corresponding to the specific variable display is A first display result suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state or a second display result suggesting that the control is not in the advantageous state can be derived,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
In the specific variable display, when the second display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of reduced identification information, control is possible to the second advantageous state based on the specific pending information,
In the specific variable display, it is possible to temporarily stop the variable display of the identification information and then resume the variable display again,
A preview effect can be executed when the re-variable display is executed,
As a display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information, the execution rate of the preview effect is different between when the first display result is derived and when the second display result is derived.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images